// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (access/Ownable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * By default, the owner account will be the one that deploys the contract. This
 * can later be changed with {transferOwnership}.
 *
 * This module is used through inheritance. It will make available the modifier
 * `onlyOwner`, which can be applied to your functions to restrict their use to
 * the owner.
 */
abstract contract OwnableUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    address private _owner;
    event OwnershipTransferred(address indexed previousOwner, address indexed newOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the contract setting the deployer as the initial owner.
     */
    function __Ownable_init() internal onlyInitializing {
        __Ownable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __Ownable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
        _transferOwnership(_msgSender());
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if called by any account other than the owner.
     */
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        _checkOwner();
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if the sender is not the owner.
     */
    function _checkOwner() internal view virtual {
        require(owner() == _msgSender(), "Ownable: caller is not the owner");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Leaves the contract without owner. It will not be possible to call
     * `onlyOwner` functions anymore. Can only be called by the current owner.
     *
     * NOTE: Renouncing ownership will leave the contract without an owner,
     * thereby removing any functionality that is only available to the owner.
     */
    function renounceOwnership() public virtual onlyOwner {
        _transferOwnership(address(0));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Can only be called by the current owner.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address newOwner) public virtual onlyOwner {
        require(newOwner != address(0), "Ownable: new owner is the zero address");
        _transferOwnership(newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     */
    function _transferOwnership(address newOwner) internal virtual {
        address oldOwner = _owner;
        _owner = newOwner;
        emit OwnershipTransferred(oldOwner, newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[49] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (finance/PaymentSplitter.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @title PaymentSplitter
 * @dev This contract allows to split Ether payments among a group of accounts. The sender does not need to be aware
 * that the Ether will be split in this way, since it is handled transparently by the contract.
 *
 * The split can be in equal parts or in any other arbitrary proportion. The way this is specified is by assigning each
 * account to a number of shares. Of all the Ether that this contract receives, each account will then be able to claim
 * an amount proportional to the percentage of total shares they were assigned. The distribution of shares is set at the
 * time of contract deployment and can't be updated thereafter.
 *
 * `PaymentSplitter` follows a _pull payment_ model. This means that payments are not automatically forwarded to the
 * accounts but kept in this contract, and the actual transfer is triggered as a separate step by calling the {release}
 * function.
 *
 * NOTE: This contract assumes that ERC20 tokens will behave similarly to native tokens (Ether). Rebasing tokens, and
 * tokens that apply fees during transfers, are likely to not be supported as expected. If in doubt, we encourage you
 * to run tests before sending real value to this contract.
 */
contract PaymentSplitterUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    event PayeeAdded(address account, uint256 shares);
    event PaymentReleased(address to, uint256 amount);
    event ERC20PaymentReleased(IERC20Upgradeable indexed token, address to, uint256 amount);
    event PaymentReceived(address from, uint256 amount);
    uint256 private _totalShares;
    uint256 private _totalReleased;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _shares;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _released;
    address[] private _payees;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => uint256) private _erc20TotalReleased;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => mapping(address => uint256)) private _erc20Released;
    /**
     * @dev Creates an instance of `PaymentSplitter` where each account in `payees` is assigned the number of shares at
     * the matching position in the `shares` array.
     *
     * All addresses in `payees` must be non-zero. Both arrays must have the same non-zero length, and there must be no
     * duplicates in `payees`.
     */
    function __PaymentSplitter_init(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(payees, shares_);
    }
    function __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        require(payees.length == shares_.length, "PaymentSplitter: payees and shares length mismatch");
        require(payees.length > 0, "PaymentSplitter: no payees");
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < payees.length; i++) {
            _addPayee(payees[i], shares_[i]);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev The Ether received will be logged with {PaymentReceived} events. Note that these events are not fully
     * reliable: it's possible for a contract to receive Ether without triggering this function. This only affects the
     * reliability of the events, and not the actual splitting of Ether.
     *
     * To learn more about this see the Solidity documentation for
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/contracts.html#fallback-function[fallback
     * functions].
     */
    receive() external payable virtual {
        emit PaymentReceived(_msgSender(), msg.value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total shares held by payees.
     */
    function totalShares() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalShares;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of Ether already released.
     */
    function totalReleased() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of `token` already released. `token` should be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function totalReleased(IERC20Upgradeable token) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20TotalReleased[token];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of shares held by an account.
     */
    function shares(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _shares[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of Ether already released to a payee.
     */
    function released(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _released[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of `token` tokens already released to a payee. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function released(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20Released[token][account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the address of the payee number `index`.
     */
    function payee(uint256 index) public view returns (address) {
        return _payees[index];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable Ether.
     */
    function releasable(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = address(this).balance + totalReleased();
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable `token` tokens. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function releasable(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = token.balanceOf(address(this)) + totalReleased(token);
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(token, account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of Ether they are owed, according to their percentage of the
     * total shares and their previous withdrawals.
     */
    function release(address payable account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _totalReleased is the sum of all values in _released.
        // If "_totalReleased += payment" does not overflow, then "_released[account] += payment" cannot overflow.
        _totalReleased += payment;
        unchecked {
            _released[account] += payment;
        }
        AddressUpgradeable.sendValue(account, payment);
        emit PaymentReleased(account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of `token` tokens they are owed, according to their
     * percentage of the total shares and their previous withdrawals. `token` must be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function release(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(token, account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _erc20TotalReleased[token] is the sum of all values in _erc20Released[token].
        // If "_erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment" does not overflow, then "_erc20Released[token][account] += payment"
        // cannot overflow.
        _erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment;
        unchecked {
            _erc20Released[token][account] += payment;
        }
        SafeERC20Upgradeable.safeTransfer(token, account, payment);
        emit ERC20PaymentReleased(token, account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev internal logic for computing the pending payment of an `account` given the token historical balances and
     * already released amounts.
     */
    function _pendingPayment(
        address account,
        uint256 totalReceived,
        uint256 alreadyReleased
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        return (totalReceived * _shares[account]) / _totalShares - alreadyReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a new payee to the contract.
     * @param account The address of the payee to add.
     * @param shares_ The number of shares owned by the payee.
     */
    function _addPayee(address account, uint256 shares_) private {
        require(account != address(0), "PaymentSplitter: account is the zero address");
        require(shares_ > 0, "PaymentSplitter: shares are 0");
        require(_shares[account] == 0, "PaymentSplitter: account already has shares");
        _payees.push(account);
        _shares[account] = shares_;
        _totalShares = _totalShares + shares_;
        emit PayeeAdded(account, shares_);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[43] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.2;
import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
 * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
 * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
 *
 * For example:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
 *     function initialize() initializer public {
 *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
 *     }
 * }
 * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
 *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
 *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
 *     }
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 *
 * [CAUTION]
 * ====
 * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
 *
 * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
 * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
 * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
 * constructor() {
 *     _disableInitializers();
 * }
 * ```
 * ====
 */
abstract contract Initializable {
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
     * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
     */
    uint8 private _initialized;
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
     */
    bool private _initializing;
    /**
     * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
     */
    event Initialized(uint8 version);
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
     * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * Similar to `reinitializer(1)`, except that functions marked with `initializer` can be nested in the context of a
     * constructor.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier initializer() {
        bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
        require(
            (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
            "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        _initialized = 1;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(1);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
     * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
     * used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * A reinitializer may be used after the original initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that
     * are added through upgrades and that require initialization.
     *
     * When `version` is 1, this modifier is similar to `initializer`, except that functions marked with `reinitializer`
     * cannot be nested. If one is invoked in the context of another, execution will revert.
     *
     * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
     * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
     *
     * WARNING: setting the version to 255 will prevent any future reinitialization.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
        require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
        _initialized = version;
        _initializing = true;
        _;
        _initializing = false;
        emit Initialized(version);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializing() {
        require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
     * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
     * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
     * through proxies.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event the first time it is successfully executed.
     */
    function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
        require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
        if (_initialized < type(uint8).max) {
            _initialized = type(uint8).max;
            emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initialized`
     */
    function _getInitializedVersion() internal view returns (uint8) {
        return _initialized;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initializing`
     */
    function _isInitializing() internal view returns (bool) {
        return _initializing;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (token/common/ERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../interfaces/IERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/introspection/ERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the NFT Royalty Standard, a standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information.
 *
 * Royalty information can be specified globally for all token ids via {_setDefaultRoyalty}, and/or individually for
 * specific token ids via {_setTokenRoyalty}. The latter takes precedence over the first.
 *
 * Royalty is specified as a fraction of sale price. {_feeDenominator} is overridable but defaults to 10000, meaning the
 * fee is specified in basis points by default.
 *
 * IMPORTANT: ERC-2981 only specifies a way to signal royalty information and does not enforce its payment. See
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2981#optional-royalty-payments[Rationale] in the EIP. Marketplaces are expected to
 * voluntarily pay royalties together with sales, but note that this standard is not yet widely supported.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
abstract contract ERC2981Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC2981Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC2981_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC2981_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    struct RoyaltyInfo {
        address receiver;
        uint96 royaltyFraction;
    }
    RoyaltyInfo private _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    mapping(uint256 => RoyaltyInfo) private _tokenRoyaltyInfo;
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override(IERC165Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable) returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC2981Upgradeable).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /**
     * @inheritdoc IERC2981Upgradeable
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 _tokenId, uint256 _salePrice) public view virtual override returns (address, uint256) {
        RoyaltyInfo memory royalty = _tokenRoyaltyInfo[_tokenId];
        if (royalty.receiver == address(0)) {
            royalty = _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
        }
        uint256 royaltyAmount = (_salePrice * royalty.royaltyFraction) / _feeDenominator();
        return (royalty.receiver, royaltyAmount);
    }
    /**
     * @dev The denominator with which to interpret the fee set in {_setTokenRoyalty} and {_setDefaultRoyalty} as a
     * fraction of the sale price. Defaults to 10000 so fees are expressed in basis points, but may be customized by an
     * override.
     */
    function _feeDenominator() internal pure virtual returns (uint96) {
        return 10000;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information that all ids in this contract will default to.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setDefaultRoyalty(address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: invalid receiver");
        _defaultRoyaltyInfo = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes default royalty information.
     */
    function _deleteDefaultRoyalty() internal virtual {
        delete _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information for a specific token id, overriding the global default.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setTokenRoyalty(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    ) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: Invalid parameters");
        _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Resets royalty information for the token id back to the global default.
     */
    function _resetTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        delete _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId];
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[48] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC20/extensions/draft-IERC20Permit.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 Permit extension allowing approvals to be made via signatures, as defined in
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612[EIP-2612].
 *
 * Adds the {permit} method, which can be used to change an account's ERC20 allowance (see {IERC20-allowance}) by
 * presenting a message signed by the account. By not relying on {IERC20-approve}, the token holder account doesn't
 * need to send a transaction, and thus is not required to hold Ether at all.
 */
interface IERC20PermitUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Sets `value` as the allowance of `spender` over ``owner``'s tokens,
     * given ``owner``'s signed approval.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: The same issues {IERC20-approve} has related to transaction
     * ordering also apply here.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `spender` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `deadline` must be a timestamp in the future.
     * - `v`, `r` and `s` must be a valid `secp256k1` signature from `owner`
     * over the EIP712-formatted function arguments.
     * - the signature must use ``owner``'s current nonce (see {nonces}).
     *
     * For more information on the signature format, see the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612#specification[relevant EIP
     * section].
     */
    function permit(
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the current nonce for `owner`. This value must be
     * included whenever a signature is generated for {permit}.
     *
     * Every successful call to {permit} increases ``owner``'s nonce by one. This
     * prevents a signature from being used multiple times.
     */
    function nonces(address owner) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the domain separator used in the encoding of the signature for {permit}, as defined by {EIP712}.
     */
    // solhint-disable-next-line func-name-mixedcase
    function DOMAIN_SEPARATOR() external view returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (token/ERC20/IERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 standard as defined in the EIP.
 */
interface IERC20Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `value` tokens are moved from one account (`from`) to
     * another (`to`).
     *
     * Note that `value` may be zero.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when the allowance of a `spender` for an `owner` is set by
     * a call to {approve}. `value` is the new allowance.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens in existence.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens owned by `account`.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from the caller's account to `to`.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transfer(address to, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the remaining number of tokens that `spender` will be
     * allowed to spend on behalf of `owner` through {transferFrom}. This is
     * zero by default.
     *
     * This value changes when {approve} or {transferFrom} are called.
     */
    function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Sets `amount` as the allowance of `spender` over the caller's tokens.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: Beware that changing an allowance with this method brings the risk
     * that someone may use both the old and the new allowance by unfortunate
     * transaction ordering. One possible solution to mitigate this race
     * condition is to first reduce the spender's allowance to 0 and set the
     * desired value afterwards:
     * https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20#issuecomment-263524729
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address spender, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from `from` to `to` using the
     * allowance mechanism. `amount` is then deducted from the caller's
     * allowance.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 amount
    ) external returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../IERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../extensions/draft-IERC20PermitUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @title SafeERC20
 * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
 * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
 * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
 * successful.
 * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
 * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
 */
library SafeERC20Upgradeable {
    using AddressUpgradeable for address;
    function safeTransfer(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transfer.selector, to, value));
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transferFrom.selector, from, to, value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Deprecated. This function has issues similar to the ones found in
     * {IERC20-approve}, and its usage is discouraged.
     *
     * Whenever possible, use {safeIncreaseAllowance} and
     * {safeDecreaseAllowance} instead.
     */
    function safeApprove(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        // safeApprove should only be called when setting an initial allowance,
        // or when resetting it to zero. To increase and decrease it, use
        // 'safeIncreaseAllowance' and 'safeDecreaseAllowance'
        require(
            (value == 0) || (token.allowance(address(this), spender) == 0),
            "SafeERC20: approve from non-zero to non-zero allowance"
        );
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, value));
    }
    function safeIncreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        uint256 newAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender) + value;
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
    }
    function safeDecreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        unchecked {
            uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
            require(oldAllowance >= value, "SafeERC20: decreased allowance below zero");
            uint256 newAllowance = oldAllowance - value;
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
        }
    }
    function safePermit(
        IERC20PermitUpgradeable token,
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) internal {
        uint256 nonceBefore = token.nonces(owner);
        token.permit(owner, spender, value, deadline, v, r, s);
        uint256 nonceAfter = token.nonces(owner);
        require(nonceAfter == nonceBefore + 1, "SafeERC20: permit did not succeed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     */
    function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20Upgradeable token, bytes memory data) private {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address-functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
        // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.
        bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data, "SafeERC20: low-level call failed");
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // Return data is optional
            require(abi.decode(returndata, (bool)), "SafeERC20: ERC20 operation did not succeed");
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Address.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library AddressUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.
        return account.code.length > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
     * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
     *
     * _Available since v4.8._
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            if (returndata.length == 0) {
                // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
            }
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert(errorMessage);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract ContextUpgradeable is Initializable {
    function __Context_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __Context_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
 */
abstract contract ERC165Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC165_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC165_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165Upgradeable).interfaceId;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Tree proofs.
 *
 * The tree and the proofs can be generated using our
 * https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/merkle-tree[JavaScript library].
 * You will find a quickstart guide in the readme.
 *
 * WARNING: You should avoid using leaf values that are 64 bytes long prior to
 * hashing, or use a hash function other than keccak256 for hashing leaves.
 * This is because the concatenation of a sorted pair of internal nodes in
 * the merkle tree could be reinterpreted as a leaf value.
 * OpenZeppelin's JavaScript library generates merkle trees that are safe
 * against this attack out of the box.
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProof(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {verify}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function verifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProofCalldata(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the rebuilt hash obtained by traversing a Merkle tree up
     * from `leaf` using `proof`. A `proof` is valid if and only if the rebuilt
     * hash matches the root of the tree. When processing the proof, the pairs
     * of leafs & pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     *
     * _Available since v4.4._
     */
    function processProof(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processProof}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processProofCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the `leaves` can be simultaneously proven to be a part of a merkle tree defined by
     * `root`, according to `proof` and `proofFlags` as described in {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProof(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {multiProofVerify}
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProofCalldata(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the root of a tree reconstructed from `leaves` and sibling nodes in `proof`. The reconstruction
     * proceeds by incrementally reconstructing all inner nodes by combining a leaf/inner node with either another
     * leaf/inner node or a proof sibling node, depending on whether each `proofFlags` item is true or false
     * respectively.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. To use multiproofs, it is sufficient to ensure that: 1) the tree
     * is complete (but not necessarily perfect), 2) the leaves to be proven are in the opposite order they are in the
     * tree (i.e., as seen from right to left starting at the deepest layer and continuing at the next layer).
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProof(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProofCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    function _hashPair(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32) {
        return a < b ? _efficientHash(a, b) : _efficientHash(b, a);
    }
    function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, a)
            mstore(0x20, b)
            value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
import "erc721a-upgradeable/contracts/extensions/ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/access/OwnableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/common/ERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/finance/PaymentSplitterUpgradeable.sol";
import "operator-filter-registry/src/upgradeable/OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
import "./ICommon.sol";
struct PhaseSettings {
    /// @dev phase supply. This can be released to public by ending the phase.
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the phase
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev wallet maximum for the phase
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev merkle root for the phase (if applicable, otherwise bytes32(0))
    bytes32 merkleRoot;
    /// @dev whether the phase is active
    bool isActive;
    /// @dev price for the phase (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct BaseSettings {
    /// @dev public sale supply. ending a phase will carry supply into this value
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev global wallet maximum across all phases (including public)
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the public sale
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev price for the public sale (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct SaleState {
    uint64 numPhases;
    mapping(uint256 => PhaseSettings) phases;
}
error PhaseNotActive();
error InvalidPhase();
/// @author Bueno.art
/// @title ERC-721 Multi-Phase Drop Contract
contract Bueno721Drop is
    ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable,
    OwnableUpgradeable,
    ERC2981Upgradeable,
    PaymentSplitterUpgradeable,
    OperatorFiltererUpgradeable
{
    string public _baseTokenURI;
    SaleState public saleState;
    BaseSettings public baseSettings;
    uint256 public maxSupply;
    address[] public withdrawAddresses;
    mapping(address => mapping(uint256 => uint64)) private amountMintedForPhase;
    bool public isPublicActive;
    bool private allowBurning;
    event TokensMinted(address indexed to, uint256 quantity);
    event TokenBurned(address indexed owner, uint256 tokenId);
    event TokensAirdropped(uint256 numRecipients, uint256 numTokens);
    event PhasesActivated(uint256[] phaseIds, bool activatedPublic);
    event PhasesPaused(uint256[] phaseIds, bool pausedPublic);
    event PhaseEnded(uint256 phaseIds);
    event BurnStatusChanged(bool burnActive);
    event PhaseSettingsUpdated(uint256 phaseId, PhaseSettings settings);
    event BaseSettingsUpdated(BaseSettings settings);
    event BaseURIUpdated(string baseURI);
    event RoyaltyUpdated(address royaltyAddress, uint96 royaltyAmount);
    /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
    constructor() {
        _disableInitializers();
    }
    function initialize(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PhaseSettings[] calldata _phases,
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        uint256 _maxIntendedSupply,
        bool _allowBurning,
        address _deployer,
        address _operatorFilter
    ) public initializerERC721A initializer {
        __ERC721A_init(_name, _symbol);
        __Ownable_init();
        __PaymentSplitter_init(
            _paymentSplitterSettings.payees,
            _paymentSplitterSettings.shares
        );
        uint64 numPhases = uint64(_phases.length);
        uint256 supplyValidationCount = _baseSettings.maxSupply;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            saleState.phases[i] = _phases[i];
            supplyValidationCount += _phases[i].maxSupply;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        require(
            supplyValidationCount == _maxIntendedSupply,
            "Supply of all phases must equal maxIntendedSupply"
        );
        _baseTokenURI = _baseUri;
        withdrawAddresses = _paymentSplitterSettings.payees;
        saleState.numPhases = numPhases;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        allowBurning = _allowBurning;
        maxSupply = _maxIntendedSupply;
        _setDefaultRoyalty(
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAddress,
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAmount
        );
        transferOwnership(_deployer);
        OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.__OperatorFilterer_init(
            _operatorFilter,
            _operatorFilter == address(0) ? false : true // only subscribe if a filter is provided
        );
    }
    // ========= EXTERNAL MINTING METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for an allowlisted phase
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that doesn't have an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhaseAllowlist(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64 quantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof
    ) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
            msg.sender,
            quantity,
            proof,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
        amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for a non-allowlist phase.
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that has an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhase(uint256 phaseIndex, uint64 quantity) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
            msg.sender,
            quantity,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
        amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in the public sale
     */
    function mintPublic(uint64 quantity) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPublicMintConditions(
            quantity,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in all possible phases (including public sale)
     */
    function mintBatch(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        bytes32[][] calldata proofs,
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        uint64 publicQuantity
    ) external payable {
        uint256 phaseLength = phaseIndices.length;
        if (
            phaseLength > saleState.numPhases ||
            phaseLength != quantities.length ||
            phaseLength != proofs.length
        ) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        uint256 balance = msg.value;
        uint256 quantityToMint;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseLength; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmount;
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            uint64 quantity = quantities[i];
            bytes32[] calldata proof = proofs[i];
            PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
            uint256 priceForPhase = phase.price * quantity;
            // Since price is strictly checked in the _check* functions below,
            // we have an additional check here to ensure that the balance doesn't underflow
            if (balance < priceForPhase) {
                revert InvalidPrice();
            }
            // if the phase has no allowlist, the merkleRoot will be zeroed out.
            if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
                updatedAmount = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
                    msg.sender,
                    quantity,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            } else {
                updatedAmount = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
                    msg.sender,
                    quantity,
                    proof,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            }
            // quantity & phaseLength have a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            // balance underflow is checked above
            unchecked {
                saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
                amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmount;
                balance -= priceForPhase;
                quantityToMint += quantity;
                ++i;
            }
        }
        uint256 totalMintQuantity = quantityToMint;
        if (publicQuantity > 0) {
            _checkPublicMintConditions(publicQuantity, balance);
            // publicQuantity has a max value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                baseSettings.amountMinted += publicQuantity;
                totalMintQuantity += publicQuantity;
            }
        }
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        _mint(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Burn a token, if the contract allows for it
     */
    function burn(uint256 tokenId) external {
        if (!allowBurning) {
            revert BurningNotAllowed();
        }
        _burn(tokenId, true);
        emit TokenBurned(msg.sender, tokenId);
    }
    // ========= OWNER METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for a particular phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the phase that is specified in the airdropper.
     */
    function airdropForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = phase.amountMinted + quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            phase.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for the public phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the public phase.
     */
    function airdropPublic(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted +
                quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are active.
     * Public sale can be activated by setting `activatePublic` to true.
     */
    function activatePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool activatePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        // activate all the phases provided in phaseIndices
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndices[i]].isActive = true;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with activatePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be activated, but it does not pause it.
        if (activatePublic) {
            isPublicActive = true;
        }
        emit PhasesActivated(phaseIndices, activatePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are inactive (paused).
     * Public sale can be paused by setting `pausePublic` to true.
     * Pausing is separate from ending, since ending permanently closes the phase.
     */
    function pausePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool pausePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = false;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with pausePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be paused, but it does not pause it.
        if (pausePublic) {
            isPublicActive = false;
        }
        emit PhasesPaused(phaseIndices, pausePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice If enabled, the token can be burned, for approved operators.
     * @dev The burn method will revert unless this is enabled
     */
    function toggleBurning() external onlyOwner {
        allowBurning = !allowBurning;
        emit BurnStatusChanged(allowBurning);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Permanently closes a phase by capping the supply & releasing it
     */
    function endPhase(uint256 phaseIndex) public onlyOwner {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        // if the phase never had supply, there is nothing to do
        if (phase.maxSupply == 0) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        // transfer the remaining supply into the base settings (used for public sale accounting)
        baseSettings.maxSupply += phase.maxSupply - phase.amountMinted;
        // remove the supply from the phase
        phase.maxSupply = 0;
        emit PhaseEnded(phaseIndex);
    }
    function endPhases(uint64[] calldata phaseIndices) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 phaseIndicesLength = phaseIndices.length;
        // ensure that phaseIndices argument will only ever be as large as the number of phases
        if (phaseIndicesLength > saleState.numPhases) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseIndicesLength; ) {
            endPhase(phaseIndices[i]);
            // phaseIndicesLength has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the minting rules for a particular phase
     * @dev supply & amountMinted are not changeable
     */
    function updatePhaseSettings(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        PhaseSettings calldata phase
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted;
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply;
        bool existingStatus = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex] = phase;
        // ensure that the amountMinted, maxSupply, and status values cannot be set
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = existingStatus;
        emit PhaseSettingsUpdated(phaseIndex, phase);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the the base minting settings
     * The global maxPerWallet setting applies to all phases
     * Pricing and other fields will apply to the public sale
     *
     * @dev maxSupply & amountMinted are not changeable
     */
    function updateBaseSettings(
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = baseSettings.maxSupply;
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        // ensure that the maxSupply & amountMinted value cannot be set
        baseSettings.maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        baseSettings.amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        emit BaseSettingsUpdated(_baseSettings);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Payment can be pulled via PaymentSplitter.release
     * this method is provided for convenience to release all payee funds
     */
    function withdraw() external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numAddresses = withdrawAddresses.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numAddresses; ) {
            address payable withdrawAddress = payable(withdrawAddresses[i]);
            if (releasable(withdrawAddress) > 0) {
                release(withdrawAddress);
            }
            // numAddresses has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    function setBaseURI(string memory baseURI) external onlyOwner {
        _baseTokenURI = baseURI;
        emit BaseURIUpdated(baseURI);
    }
    function setRoyaltyInfo(
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeBasisPoints
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
        emit RoyaltyUpdated(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
    }
    // ========= VIEW METHODS =========
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        return 1;
    }
    function _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
        address wallet,
        uint64 quantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // there should be a valid merkle root for the phase
        if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        if (
            !MerkleProof.verify(
                proof,
                phase.merkleRoot,
                keccak256(abi.encodePacked(wallet))
            )
        ) {
            revert InvalidProof();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        // phases can have a maxPerWallet
        if (
            phase.maxPerWallet > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPhaseMintConditions(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // the phase should not have a merkleRoot
        if (phase.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        // phases can have a maxPerWallet
        if (
            phase.maxPerWallet > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPublicMintConditions(
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        if (!isPublicActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted + quantity;
        if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * baseSettings.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal view {
        if (
            baseSettings.maxPerWallet > 0 &&
            _numberMinted(wallet) + quantity > baseSettings.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
    }
    function getDataForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex
    ) external view returns (PhaseSettings memory) {
        return saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
    }
    function getMintBalance(address wallet) external view returns (uint256) {
        return _numberMinted(wallet);
    }
    function getAmountMintedForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint64) {
        return amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
    }
    function getAmountMintedForOwner(
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory) {
        uint256[] memory amountMintedPerPhase = new uint256[](
            saleState.numPhases + 1
        );
        for (uint64 i = 0; i < saleState.numPhases; ) {
            amountMintedPerPhase[i] = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][i];
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        amountMintedPerPhase[saleState.numPhases] = _numberMinted(wallet);
        return amountMintedPerPhase;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {ERC721-_baseURI}.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _baseTokenURI;
    }
    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    )
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(IERC721AUpgradeable, ERC721AUpgradeable, ERC2981Upgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return
            ERC721AUpgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            ERC2981Upgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    // ========= OPERATOR FILTERER OVERRIDES =========
    function setApprovalForAll(
        address operator,
        bool approved
    )
        public
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.setApprovalForAll(operator, approved);
    }
    function approve(
        address operator,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.approve(operator, tokenId);
    }
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory data
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, data);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
error InvalidPrice();
error SoldOut();
error ExceedMaxPerWallet();
error InvalidProof();
error InvalidMintFunction();
error InvalidAirdrop();
error BurningNotAllowed();
struct PaymentSplitterSettings {
    address[] payees;
    uint256[] shares;
}
struct RoyaltySettings {
    address royaltyAddress;
    uint96 royaltyAmount;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable diamond facet contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 */
import {ERC721A__InitializableStorage} from './ERC721A__InitializableStorage.sol';
abstract contract ERC721A__Initializable {
    using ERC721A__InitializableStorage for ERC721A__InitializableStorage.Layout;
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initializer function from being invoked twice.
     */
    modifier initializerERC721A() {
        // If the contract is initializing we ignore whether _initialized is set in order to support multiple
        // inheritance patterns, but we only do this in the context of a constructor, because in other contexts the
        // contract may have been reentered.
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing
                ? _isConstructor()
                : !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is already initialized'
        );
        bool isTopLevelCall = !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = true;
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} modifier, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializingERC721A() {
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is not initializing'
        );
        _;
    }
    /// @dev Returns true if and only if the function is running in the constructor
    function _isConstructor() private view returns (bool) {
        // extcodesize checks the size of the code stored in an address, and
        // address returns the current address. Since the code is still not
        // deployed when running a constructor, any checks on its code size will
        // yield zero, making it an effective way to detect if a contract is
        // under construction or not.
        address self = address(this);
        uint256 cs;
        assembly {
            cs := extcodesize(self)
        }
        return cs == 0;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base storage for the  initialization function for upgradeable diamond facet contracts
 **/
library ERC721A__InitializableStorage {
    struct Layout {
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         */
        bool _initialized;
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool _initializing;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.initializable.facet');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
library ERC721AStorage {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }
    struct Layout {
        // =============================================================
        //                            STORAGE
        // =============================================================
        // The next token ID to be minted.
        uint256 _currentIndex;
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 _burnCounter;
        // Token name
        string _name;
        // Token symbol
        string _symbol;
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
        // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..159]   `addr`
        // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
        // - [224]      `burned`
        // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
        // - [232..255] `extraData`
        mapping(uint256 => uint256) _packedOwnerships;
        // Mapping owner address to address data.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..63]    `balance`
        // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
        // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
        // - [192..255] `aux`
        mapping(address => uint256) _packedAddressData;
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
        mapping(uint256 => ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef) _tokenApprovals;
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) _operatorApprovals;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.ERC721A');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import {ERC721AStorage} from './ERC721AStorage.sol';
import './ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}
/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721AUpgradeable is ERC721A__Initializable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
    using ERC721AStorage for ERC721AStorage.Layout;
    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================
    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;
    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;
    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;
    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;
    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;
    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;
    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;
    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;
    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;
    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;
    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;
    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;
    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================
    function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
    }
    function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._name = name_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol = symbol_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = _startTokenId();
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID.
     * To change the starting token ID, please override this function.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) revert BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }
    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._name;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : '';
    }
    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return '';
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index]);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }
    /**
     * Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256 packed) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];
            // If not burned.
            if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) {
                // If the data at the starting slot does not exist, start the scan.
                if (packed == 0) {
                    if (tokenId >= ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
                    // Invariant:
                    // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // before an unintialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // Hence, `tokenId` will not underflow.
                    //
                    // We can directly compare the packed value.
                    // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                    for (;;) {
                        unchecked {
                            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[--tokenId];
                        }
                        if (packed == 0) continue;
                        return packed;
                    }
                }
                // Otherwise, the data exists and is not burned. We can skip the scan.
                // This is possible because we have already achieved the target condition.
                // This saves 2143 gas on transfers of initialized tokens.
                return packed;
            }
        }
        revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account. See {ERC721A-_approve}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        _approve(to, tokenId, true);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return
            _startTokenId() <= tokenId &&
            tokenId < ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex && // If within bounds,
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0; // and not burned.
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) revert TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        if (to == address(0)) revert TransferToZeroAddress();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, to, tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '');
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try
            ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data)
        returns (bytes4 retval) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            } else {
                assembly {
                    revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                }
            }
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            uint256 toMasked;
            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;
            // Use assembly to loop and emit the `Transfer` event for gas savings.
            // The duplicated `log4` removes an extra check and reduces stack juggling.
            // The assembly, together with the surrounding Solidity code, have been
            // delicately arranged to nudge the compiler into producing optimized opcodes.
            assembly {
                // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
                toMasked := and(to, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
                // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                log4(
                    0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                    0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                    _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                    0, // `address(0)`.
                    toMasked, // `to`.
                    startTokenId // `tokenId`.
                )
                // The `iszero(eq(,))` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
                // The compiler will optimize the `iszero` away for performance.
                for {
                    let tokenId := add(startTokenId, 1)
                } iszero(eq(tokenId, end)) {
                    tokenId := add(tokenId, 1)
                } {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event. Similar to above.
                    log4(0, 0, _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, 0, toMasked, tokenId)
                }
            }
            if (toMasked == 0) revert MintToZeroAddress();
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) revert MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);
        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // Reentrancy protection.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex != end) revert();
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, '');
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_approve(to, tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _approve(to, tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function _approve(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bool approvalCheck
    ) internal virtual {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck)
            if (_msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
                if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                    revert ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
                }
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        }
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
        unchecked {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter++;
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) revert OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)
            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str
            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }
            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is
    ERC721A__Initializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        TokenOwnership memory ownership;
        if (tokenId < _startTokenId() || tokenId >= _nextTokenId()) {
            return ownership;
        }
        ownership = _ownershipAt(tokenId);
        if (ownership.burned) {
            return ownership;
        }
        return _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] calldata tokenIds)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership[] memory)
    {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = tokenIds.length;
            TokenOwnership[] memory ownerships = new TokenOwnership[](tokenIdsLength);
            for (uint256 i; i != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownerships[i] = explicitOwnershipOf(tokenIds[i]);
            }
            return ownerships;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) revert InvalidQueryRange();
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            uint256 stopLimit = _nextTokenId();
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) {
                start = _startTokenId();
            }
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop > stopLimit) {
                stop = stopLimit;
            }
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), stop - start)`,
            // to cater for cases where `balanceOf(owner)` is too big.
            if (start < stop) {
                uint256 rangeLength = stop - start;
                if (rangeLength < tokenIdsMaxLength) {
                    tokenIdsMaxLength = rangeLength;
                }
            } else {
                tokenIdsMaxLength = 0;
            }
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsMaxLength);
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength == 0) {
                return tokenIds;
            }
            // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
            // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
            TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned), initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
            // `ownership.address` will not be zero, as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
            if (!ownership.burned) {
                currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
            }
            for (uint256 i = start; i != stop && tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsMaxLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            // Downsize the array to fit.
            assembly {
                mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = balanceOf(owner);
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsLength);
            TokenOwnership memory ownership;
            for (uint256 i = _startTokenId(); tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import '../IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] memory tokenIds) external view returns (TokenOwnership[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================
    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);
    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
interface IOperatorFilterRegistry {
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function register(address registrant) external;
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external;
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function unregister(address addr) external;
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered) external;
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codehash, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered) external;
    function subscribe(address registrant, address registrantToSubscribe) external;
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external;
    function subscriptionOf(address addr) external returns (address registrant);
    function subscribers(address registrant) external returns (address[] memory);
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external returns (bool);
    function filteredOperators(address addr) external returns (address[] memory);
    function filteredCodeHashes(address addr) external returns (bytes32[] memory);
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (bytes32);
    function isRegistered(address addr) external returns (bool);
    function codeHashOf(address addr) external returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {IOperatorFilterRegistry} from "../IOperatorFilterRegistry.sol";
import {Initializable} from "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
abstract contract OperatorFiltererUpgradeable is Initializable {
    error OperatorNotAllowed(address operator);
    IOperatorFilterRegistry constant operatorFilterRegistry =
        IOperatorFilterRegistry(0x000000000000AAeB6D7670E522A718067333cd4E);
    function __OperatorFilterer_init(address subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, bool subscribe)
        internal
        onlyInitializing
    {
        // If an inheriting token contract is deployed to a network without the registry deployed, the modifier
        // will not revert, but the contract will need to be registered with the registry once it is deployed in
        // order for the modifier to filter addresses.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isRegistered(address(this))) {
                if (subscribe) {
                    operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndSubscribe(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                } else {
                    if (subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy != address(0)) {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndCopyEntries(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                    } else {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.register(address(this));
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperator(address from) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            // Allow spending tokens from addresses with balance
            // Note that this still allows listings and marketplaces with escrow to transfer tokens if transferred
            // from an EOA.
            if (from == msg.sender) {
                _;
                return;
            }
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), msg.sender)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(msg.sender);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(address operator) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), operator)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(operator);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;

/// @title IProxy - Helper interface to access masterCopy of the Proxy on-chain
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.io>
interface IProxy {
    function masterCopy() external view returns (address);
}

/// @title GnosisSafeProxy - Generic proxy contract allows to execute all transactions applying the code of a master contract.
/// @author Stefan George - <stefan@gnosis.io>
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.io>
contract GnosisSafeProxy {
    // singleton always needs to be first declared variable, to ensure that it is at the same location in the contracts to which calls are delegated.
    // To reduce deployment costs this variable is internal and needs to be retrieved via `getStorageAt`
    address internal singleton;

    /// @dev Constructor function sets address of singleton contract.
    /// @param _singleton Singleton address.
    constructor(address _singleton) {
        require(_singleton != address(0), "Invalid singleton address provided");
        singleton = _singleton;
    }

    /// @dev Fallback function forwards all transactions and returns all received return data.
    fallback() external payable {
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            let _singleton := and(sload(0), 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff)
            // 0xa619486e == keccak("masterCopy()"). The value is right padded to 32-bytes with 0s
            if eq(calldataload(0), 0xa619486e00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000) {
                mstore(0, _singleton)
                return(0, 0x20)
            }
            calldatacopy(0, 0, calldatasize())
            let success := delegatecall(gas(), _singleton, 0, calldatasize(), 0, 0)
            returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
            if eq(success, 0) {
                revert(0, returndatasize())
            }
            return(0, returndatasize())
        }
    }
}

/// @title Proxy Factory - Allows to create new proxy contact and execute a message call to the new proxy within one transaction.
/// @author Stefan George - <stefan@gnosis.pm>
contract GnosisSafeProxyFactory {
    event ProxyCreation(GnosisSafeProxy proxy, address singleton);

    /// @dev Allows to create new proxy contact and execute a message call to the new proxy within one transaction.
    /// @param singleton Address of singleton contract.
    /// @param data Payload for message call sent to new proxy contract.
    function createProxy(address singleton, bytes memory data) public returns (GnosisSafeProxy proxy) {
        proxy = new GnosisSafeProxy(singleton);
        if (data.length > 0)
            // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
            assembly {
                if eq(call(gas(), proxy, 0, add(data, 0x20), mload(data), 0, 0), 0) {
                    revert(0, 0)
                }
            }
        emit ProxyCreation(proxy, singleton);
    }

    /// @dev Allows to retrieve the runtime code of a deployed Proxy. This can be used to check that the expected Proxy was deployed.
    function proxyRuntimeCode() public pure returns (bytes memory) {
        return type(GnosisSafeProxy).runtimeCode;
    }

    /// @dev Allows to retrieve the creation code used for the Proxy deployment. With this it is easily possible to calculate predicted address.
    function proxyCreationCode() public pure returns (bytes memory) {
        return type(GnosisSafeProxy).creationCode;
    }

    /// @dev Allows to create new proxy contact using CREATE2 but it doesn't run the initializer.
    ///      This method is only meant as an utility to be called from other methods
    /// @param _singleton Address of singleton contract.
    /// @param initializer Payload for message call sent to new proxy contract.
    /// @param saltNonce Nonce that will be used to generate the salt to calculate the address of the new proxy contract.
    function deployProxyWithNonce(
        address _singleton,
        bytes memory initializer,
        uint256 saltNonce
    ) internal returns (GnosisSafeProxy proxy) {
        // If the initializer changes the proxy address should change too. Hashing the initializer data is cheaper than just concatinating it
        bytes32 salt = keccak256(abi.encodePacked(keccak256(initializer), saltNonce));
        bytes memory deploymentData = abi.encodePacked(type(GnosisSafeProxy).creationCode, uint256(uint160(_singleton)));
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            proxy := create2(0x0, add(0x20, deploymentData), mload(deploymentData), salt)
        }
        require(address(proxy) != address(0), "Create2 call failed");
    }

    /// @dev Allows to create new proxy contact and execute a message call to the new proxy within one transaction.
    /// @param _singleton Address of singleton contract.
    /// @param initializer Payload for message call sent to new proxy contract.
    /// @param saltNonce Nonce that will be used to generate the salt to calculate the address of the new proxy contract.
    function createProxyWithNonce(
        address _singleton,
        bytes memory initializer,
        uint256 saltNonce
    ) public returns (GnosisSafeProxy proxy) {
        proxy = deployProxyWithNonce(_singleton, initializer, saltNonce);
        if (initializer.length > 0)
            // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
            assembly {
                if eq(call(gas(), proxy, 0, add(initializer, 0x20), mload(initializer), 0, 0), 0) {
                    revert(0, 0)
                }
            }
        emit ProxyCreation(proxy, _singleton);
    }

    /// @dev Allows to create new proxy contact, execute a message call to the new proxy and call a specified callback within one transaction
    /// @param _singleton Address of singleton contract.
    /// @param initializer Payload for message call sent to new proxy contract.
    /// @param saltNonce Nonce that will be used to generate the salt to calculate the address of the new proxy contract.
    /// @param callback Callback that will be invoced after the new proxy contract has been successfully deployed and initialized.
    function createProxyWithCallback(
        address _singleton,
        bytes memory initializer,
        uint256 saltNonce,
        IProxyCreationCallback callback
    ) public returns (GnosisSafeProxy proxy) {
        uint256 saltNonceWithCallback = uint256(keccak256(abi.encodePacked(saltNonce, callback)));
        proxy = createProxyWithNonce(_singleton, initializer, saltNonceWithCallback);
        if (address(callback) != address(0)) callback.proxyCreated(proxy, _singleton, initializer, saltNonce);
    }

    /// @dev Allows to get the address for a new proxy contact created via `createProxyWithNonce`
    ///      This method is only meant for address calculation purpose when you use an initializer that would revert,
    ///      therefore the response is returned with a revert. When calling this method set `from` to the address of the proxy factory.
    /// @param _singleton Address of singleton contract.
    /// @param initializer Payload for message call sent to new proxy contract.
    /// @param saltNonce Nonce that will be used to generate the salt to calculate the address of the new proxy contract.
    function calculateCreateProxyWithNonceAddress(
        address _singleton,
        bytes calldata initializer,
        uint256 saltNonce
    ) external returns (GnosisSafeProxy proxy) {
        proxy = deployProxyWithNonce(_singleton, initializer, saltNonce);
        revert(string(abi.encodePacked(proxy)));
    }
}

interface IProxyCreationCallback {
    function proxyCreated(
        GnosisSafeProxy proxy,
        address _singleton,
        bytes calldata initializer,
        uint256 saltNonce
    ) external;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (access/Ownable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * By default, the owner account will be the one that deploys the contract. This
 * can later be changed with {transferOwnership}.
 *
 * This module is used through inheritance. It will make available the modifier
 * `onlyOwner`, which can be applied to your functions to restrict their use to
 * the owner.
 */
abstract contract OwnableUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    address private _owner;
    event OwnershipTransferred(address indexed previousOwner, address indexed newOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the contract setting the deployer as the initial owner.
     */
    function __Ownable_init() internal onlyInitializing {
        __Ownable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __Ownable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
        _transferOwnership(_msgSender());
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if called by any account other than the owner.
     */
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        _checkOwner();
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if the sender is not the owner.
     */
    function _checkOwner() internal view virtual {
        require(owner() == _msgSender(), "Ownable: caller is not the owner");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Leaves the contract without owner. It will not be possible to call
     * `onlyOwner` functions anymore. Can only be called by the current owner.
     *
     * NOTE: Renouncing ownership will leave the contract without an owner,
     * thereby removing any functionality that is only available to the owner.
     */
    function renounceOwnership() public virtual onlyOwner {
        _transferOwnership(address(0));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Can only be called by the current owner.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address newOwner) public virtual onlyOwner {
        require(newOwner != address(0), "Ownable: new owner is the zero address");
        _transferOwnership(newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     */
    function _transferOwnership(address newOwner) internal virtual {
        address oldOwner = _owner;
        _owner = newOwner;
        emit OwnershipTransferred(oldOwner, newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[49] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (finance/PaymentSplitter.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
import "../utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @title PaymentSplitter
 * @dev This contract allows to split Ether payments among a group of accounts. The sender does not need to be aware
 * that the Ether will be split in this way, since it is handled transparently by the contract.
 *
 * The split can be in equal parts or in any other arbitrary proportion. The way this is specified is by assigning each
 * account to a number of shares. Of all the Ether that this contract receives, each account will then be able to claim
 * an amount proportional to the percentage of total shares they were assigned. The distribution of shares is set at the
 * time of contract deployment and can't be updated thereafter.
 *
 * `PaymentSplitter` follows a _pull payment_ model. This means that payments are not automatically forwarded to the
 * accounts but kept in this contract, and the actual transfer is triggered as a separate step by calling the {release}
 * function.
 *
 * NOTE: This contract assumes that ERC20 tokens will behave similarly to native tokens (Ether). Rebasing tokens, and
 * tokens that apply fees during transfers, are likely to not be supported as expected. If in doubt, we encourage you
 * to run tests before sending real value to this contract.
 */
contract PaymentSplitterUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    event PayeeAdded(address account, uint256 shares);
    event PaymentReleased(address to, uint256 amount);
    event ERC20PaymentReleased(IERC20Upgradeable indexed token, address to, uint256 amount);
    event PaymentReceived(address from, uint256 amount);
    uint256 private _totalShares;
    uint256 private _totalReleased;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _shares;
    mapping(address => uint256) private _released;
    address[] private _payees;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => uint256) private _erc20TotalReleased;
    mapping(IERC20Upgradeable => mapping(address => uint256)) private _erc20Released;
    /**
     * @dev Creates an instance of `PaymentSplitter` where each account in `payees` is assigned the number of shares at
     * the matching position in the `shares` array.
     *
     * All addresses in `payees` must be non-zero. Both arrays must have the same non-zero length, and there must be no
     * duplicates in `payees`.
     */
    function __PaymentSplitter_init(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(payees, shares_);
    }
    function __PaymentSplitter_init_unchained(address[] memory payees, uint256[] memory shares_) internal onlyInitializing {
        require(payees.length == shares_.length, "PaymentSplitter: payees and shares length mismatch");
        require(payees.length > 0, "PaymentSplitter: no payees");
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < payees.length; i++) {
            _addPayee(payees[i], shares_[i]);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev The Ether received will be logged with {PaymentReceived} events. Note that these events are not fully
     * reliable: it's possible for a contract to receive Ether without triggering this function. This only affects the
     * reliability of the events, and not the actual splitting of Ether.
     *
     * To learn more about this see the Solidity documentation for
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/contracts.html#fallback-function[fallback
     * functions].
     */
    receive() external payable virtual {
        emit PaymentReceived(_msgSender(), msg.value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total shares held by payees.
     */
    function totalShares() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalShares;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of Ether already released.
     */
    function totalReleased() public view returns (uint256) {
        return _totalReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the total amount of `token` already released. `token` should be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function totalReleased(IERC20Upgradeable token) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20TotalReleased[token];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of shares held by an account.
     */
    function shares(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _shares[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of Ether already released to a payee.
     */
    function released(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _released[account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of `token` tokens already released to a payee. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function released(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        return _erc20Released[token][account];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the address of the payee number `index`.
     */
    function payee(uint256 index) public view returns (address) {
        return _payees[index];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable Ether.
     */
    function releasable(address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = address(this).balance + totalReleased();
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Getter for the amount of payee's releasable `token` tokens. `token` should be the address of an
     * IERC20 contract.
     */
    function releasable(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 totalReceived = token.balanceOf(address(this)) + totalReleased(token);
        return _pendingPayment(account, totalReceived, released(token, account));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of Ether they are owed, according to their percentage of the
     * total shares and their previous withdrawals.
     */
    function release(address payable account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _totalReleased is the sum of all values in _released.
        // If "_totalReleased += payment" does not overflow, then "_released[account] += payment" cannot overflow.
        _totalReleased += payment;
        unchecked {
            _released[account] += payment;
        }
        AddressUpgradeable.sendValue(account, payment);
        emit PaymentReleased(account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Triggers a transfer to `account` of the amount of `token` tokens they are owed, according to their
     * percentage of the total shares and their previous withdrawals. `token` must be the address of an IERC20
     * contract.
     */
    function release(IERC20Upgradeable token, address account) public virtual {
        require(_shares[account] > 0, "PaymentSplitter: account has no shares");
        uint256 payment = releasable(token, account);
        require(payment != 0, "PaymentSplitter: account is not due payment");
        // _erc20TotalReleased[token] is the sum of all values in _erc20Released[token].
        // If "_erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment" does not overflow, then "_erc20Released[token][account] += payment"
        // cannot overflow.
        _erc20TotalReleased[token] += payment;
        unchecked {
            _erc20Released[token][account] += payment;
        }
        SafeERC20Upgradeable.safeTransfer(token, account, payment);
        emit ERC20PaymentReleased(token, account, payment);
    }
    /**
     * @dev internal logic for computing the pending payment of an `account` given the token historical balances and
     * already released amounts.
     */
    function _pendingPayment(
        address account,
        uint256 totalReceived,
        uint256 alreadyReleased
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        return (totalReceived * _shares[account]) / _totalShares - alreadyReleased;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a new payee to the contract.
     * @param account The address of the payee to add.
     * @param shares_ The number of shares owned by the payee.
     */
    function _addPayee(address account, uint256 shares_) private {
        require(account != address(0), "PaymentSplitter: account is the zero address");
        require(shares_ > 0, "PaymentSplitter: shares are 0");
        require(_shares[account] == 0, "PaymentSplitter: account already has shares");
        _payees.push(account);
        _shares[account] = shares_;
        _totalShares = _totalShares + shares_;
        emit PayeeAdded(account, shares_);
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[43] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.2;
import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
 * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
 * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
 *
 * For example:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
 *     function initialize() initializer public {
 *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
 *     }
 * }
 * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
 *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
 *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
 *     }
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 *
 * [CAUTION]
 * ====
 * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
 *
 * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
 * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
 * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
 * constructor() {
 *     _disableInitializers();
 * }
 * ```
 * ====
 */
abstract contract Initializable {
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
     * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
     */
    uint8 private _initialized;
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
     */
    bool private _initializing;
    /**
     * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
     */
    event Initialized(uint8 version);
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
     * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * Similar to `reinitializer(1)`, except that functions marked with `initializer` can be nested in the context of a
     * constructor.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier initializer() {
        bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
        require(
            (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
            "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        _initialized = 1;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(1);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
     * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
     * used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * A reinitializer may be used after the original initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that
     * are added through upgrades and that require initialization.
     *
     * When `version` is 1, this modifier is similar to `initializer`, except that functions marked with `reinitializer`
     * cannot be nested. If one is invoked in the context of another, execution will revert.
     *
     * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
     * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
     *
     * WARNING: setting the version to 255 will prevent any future reinitialization.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event.
     */
    modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
        require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
        _initialized = version;
        _initializing = true;
        _;
        _initializing = false;
        emit Initialized(version);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializing() {
        require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
     * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
     * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
     * through proxies.
     *
     * Emits an {Initialized} event the first time it is successfully executed.
     */
    function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
        require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
        if (_initialized < type(uint8).max) {
            _initialized = type(uint8).max;
            emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initialized`
     */
    function _getInitializedVersion() internal view returns (uint8) {
        return _initialized;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Internal function that returns the initialized version. Returns `_initializing`
     */
    function _isInitializing() internal view returns (bool) {
        return _initializing;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (token/common/ERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../interfaces/IERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../utils/introspection/ERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the NFT Royalty Standard, a standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information.
 *
 * Royalty information can be specified globally for all token ids via {_setDefaultRoyalty}, and/or individually for
 * specific token ids via {_setTokenRoyalty}. The latter takes precedence over the first.
 *
 * Royalty is specified as a fraction of sale price. {_feeDenominator} is overridable but defaults to 10000, meaning the
 * fee is specified in basis points by default.
 *
 * IMPORTANT: ERC-2981 only specifies a way to signal royalty information and does not enforce its payment. See
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2981#optional-royalty-payments[Rationale] in the EIP. Marketplaces are expected to
 * voluntarily pay royalties together with sales, but note that this standard is not yet widely supported.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
abstract contract ERC2981Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC2981Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC2981_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC2981_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    struct RoyaltyInfo {
        address receiver;
        uint96 royaltyFraction;
    }
    RoyaltyInfo private _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    mapping(uint256 => RoyaltyInfo) private _tokenRoyaltyInfo;
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override(IERC165Upgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable) returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC2981Upgradeable).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    /**
     * @inheritdoc IERC2981Upgradeable
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 _tokenId, uint256 _salePrice) public view virtual override returns (address, uint256) {
        RoyaltyInfo memory royalty = _tokenRoyaltyInfo[_tokenId];
        if (royalty.receiver == address(0)) {
            royalty = _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
        }
        uint256 royaltyAmount = (_salePrice * royalty.royaltyFraction) / _feeDenominator();
        return (royalty.receiver, royaltyAmount);
    }
    /**
     * @dev The denominator with which to interpret the fee set in {_setTokenRoyalty} and {_setDefaultRoyalty} as a
     * fraction of the sale price. Defaults to 10000 so fees are expressed in basis points, but may be customized by an
     * override.
     */
    function _feeDenominator() internal pure virtual returns (uint96) {
        return 10000;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information that all ids in this contract will default to.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setDefaultRoyalty(address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: invalid receiver");
        _defaultRoyaltyInfo = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes default royalty information.
     */
    function _deleteDefaultRoyalty() internal virtual {
        delete _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information for a specific token id, overriding the global default.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setTokenRoyalty(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    ) internal virtual {
        require(feeNumerator <= _feeDenominator(), "ERC2981: royalty fee will exceed salePrice");
        require(receiver != address(0), "ERC2981: Invalid parameters");
        _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Resets royalty information for the token id back to the global default.
     */
    function _resetTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        delete _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId];
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[48] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC20/extensions/draft-IERC20Permit.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 Permit extension allowing approvals to be made via signatures, as defined in
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612[EIP-2612].
 *
 * Adds the {permit} method, which can be used to change an account's ERC20 allowance (see {IERC20-allowance}) by
 * presenting a message signed by the account. By not relying on {IERC20-approve}, the token holder account doesn't
 * need to send a transaction, and thus is not required to hold Ether at all.
 */
interface IERC20PermitUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Sets `value` as the allowance of `spender` over ``owner``'s tokens,
     * given ``owner``'s signed approval.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: The same issues {IERC20-approve} has related to transaction
     * ordering also apply here.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `spender` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `deadline` must be a timestamp in the future.
     * - `v`, `r` and `s` must be a valid `secp256k1` signature from `owner`
     * over the EIP712-formatted function arguments.
     * - the signature must use ``owner``'s current nonce (see {nonces}).
     *
     * For more information on the signature format, see the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612#specification[relevant EIP
     * section].
     */
    function permit(
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the current nonce for `owner`. This value must be
     * included whenever a signature is generated for {permit}.
     *
     * Every successful call to {permit} increases ``owner``'s nonce by one. This
     * prevents a signature from being used multiple times.
     */
    function nonces(address owner) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the domain separator used in the encoding of the signature for {permit}, as defined by {EIP712}.
     */
    // solhint-disable-next-line func-name-mixedcase
    function DOMAIN_SEPARATOR() external view returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (token/ERC20/IERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 standard as defined in the EIP.
 */
interface IERC20Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `value` tokens are moved from one account (`from`) to
     * another (`to`).
     *
     * Note that `value` may be zero.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when the allowance of a `spender` for an `owner` is set by
     * a call to {approve}. `value` is the new allowance.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens in existence.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the amount of tokens owned by `account`.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from the caller's account to `to`.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transfer(address to, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the remaining number of tokens that `spender` will be
     * allowed to spend on behalf of `owner` through {transferFrom}. This is
     * zero by default.
     *
     * This value changes when {approve} or {transferFrom} are called.
     */
    function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Sets `amount` as the allowance of `spender` over the caller's tokens.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: Beware that changing an allowance with this method brings the risk
     * that someone may use both the old and the new allowance by unfortunate
     * transaction ordering. One possible solution to mitigate this race
     * condition is to first reduce the spender's allowance to 0 and set the
     * desired value afterwards:
     * https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20#issuecomment-263524729
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address spender, uint256 amount) external returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Moves `amount` tokens from `from` to `to` using the
     * allowance mechanism. `amount` is then deducted from the caller's
     * allowance.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 amount
    ) external returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../IERC20Upgradeable.sol";
import "../extensions/draft-IERC20PermitUpgradeable.sol";
import "../../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @title SafeERC20
 * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
 * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
 * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
 * successful.
 * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
 * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
 */
library SafeERC20Upgradeable {
    using AddressUpgradeable for address;
    function safeTransfer(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transfer.selector, to, value));
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transferFrom.selector, from, to, value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Deprecated. This function has issues similar to the ones found in
     * {IERC20-approve}, and its usage is discouraged.
     *
     * Whenever possible, use {safeIncreaseAllowance} and
     * {safeDecreaseAllowance} instead.
     */
    function safeApprove(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        // safeApprove should only be called when setting an initial allowance,
        // or when resetting it to zero. To increase and decrease it, use
        // 'safeIncreaseAllowance' and 'safeDecreaseAllowance'
        require(
            (value == 0) || (token.allowance(address(this), spender) == 0),
            "SafeERC20: approve from non-zero to non-zero allowance"
        );
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, value));
    }
    function safeIncreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        uint256 newAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender) + value;
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
    }
    function safeDecreaseAllowance(
        IERC20Upgradeable token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        unchecked {
            uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
            require(oldAllowance >= value, "SafeERC20: decreased allowance below zero");
            uint256 newAllowance = oldAllowance - value;
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
        }
    }
    function safePermit(
        IERC20PermitUpgradeable token,
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) internal {
        uint256 nonceBefore = token.nonces(owner);
        token.permit(owner, spender, value, deadline, v, r, s);
        uint256 nonceAfter = token.nonces(owner);
        require(nonceAfter == nonceBefore + 1, "SafeERC20: permit did not succeed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     */
    function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20Upgradeable token, bytes memory data) private {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address-functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
        // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.
        bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data, "SafeERC20: low-level call failed");
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // Return data is optional
            require(abi.decode(returndata, (bool)), "SafeERC20: ERC20 operation did not succeed");
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/Address.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library AddressUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.
        return account.code.length > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
     * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
     *
     * _Available since v4.8._
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            if (returndata.length == 0) {
                // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
            }
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    }
    function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert(errorMessage);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract ContextUpgradeable is Initializable {
    function __Context_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __Context_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
 */
abstract contract ERC165Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC165Upgradeable {
    function __ERC165_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __ERC165_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165Upgradeable).interfaceId;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Tree proofs.
 *
 * The tree and the proofs can be generated using our
 * https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/merkle-tree[JavaScript library].
 * You will find a quickstart guide in the readme.
 *
 * WARNING: You should avoid using leaf values that are 64 bytes long prior to
 * hashing, or use a hash function other than keccak256 for hashing leaves.
 * This is because the concatenation of a sorted pair of internal nodes in
 * the merkle tree could be reinterpreted as a leaf value.
 * OpenZeppelin's JavaScript library generates merkle trees that are safe
 * against this attack out of the box.
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProof(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {verify}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function verifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProofCalldata(proof, leaf) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the rebuilt hash obtained by traversing a Merkle tree up
     * from `leaf` using `proof`. A `proof` is valid if and only if the rebuilt
     * hash matches the root of the tree. When processing the proof, the pairs
     * of leafs & pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     *
     * _Available since v4.4._
     */
    function processProof(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processProof}
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processProofCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the `leaves` can be simultaneously proven to be a part of a merkle tree defined by
     * `root`, according to `proof` and `proofFlags` as described in {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProof(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {multiProofVerify}
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function multiProofVerifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProofCalldata(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the root of a tree reconstructed from `leaves` and sibling nodes in `proof`. The reconstruction
     * proceeds by incrementally reconstructing all inner nodes by combining a leaf/inner node with either another
     * leaf/inner node or a proof sibling node, depending on whether each `proofFlags` item is true or false
     * respectively.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. To use multiproofs, it is sufficient to ensure that: 1) the tree
     * is complete (but not necessarily perfect), 2) the leaves to be proven are in the opposite order they are in the
     * tree (i.e., as seen from right to left starting at the deepest layer and continuing at the next layer).
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProof(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     *
     * _Available since v4.7._
     */
    function processMultiProofCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuild the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;
        // Check proof validity.
        require(leavesLen + proof.length - 1 == totalHashes, "MerkleProof: invalid multiproof");
        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value for the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i] ? leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++] : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }
        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }
    function _hashPair(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32) {
        return a < b ? _efficientHash(a, b) : _efficientHash(b, a);
    }
    function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, a)
            mstore(0x20, b)
            value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
import "erc721a-upgradeable/contracts/extensions/ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/access/OwnableUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/common/ERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/finance/PaymentSplitterUpgradeable.sol";
import "operator-filter-registry/src/upgradeable/OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
import "./ICommon.sol";
struct PhaseSettings {
    /// @dev phase supply. This can be released to public by ending the phase.
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the phase
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev wallet maximum for the phase
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev merkle root for the phase (if applicable, otherwise bytes32(0))
    bytes32 merkleRoot;
    /// @dev whether the phase is active
    bool isActive;
    /// @dev price for the phase (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct BaseSettings {
    /// @dev public sale supply. ending a phase will carry supply into this value
    uint64 maxSupply;
    /// @dev global wallet maximum across all phases (including public)
    uint64 maxPerWallet;
    /// @dev tracks the total amount minted in the public sale
    uint64 amountMinted;
    /// @dev price for the public sale (or free if 0)
    uint256 price;
}
struct SaleState {
    uint64 numPhases;
    mapping(uint256 => PhaseSettings) phases;
}
error PhaseNotActive();
error InvalidPhase();
/// @author Bueno.art
/// @title ERC-721 Multi-Phase Drop Contract
contract Bueno721Drop is
    ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable,
    OwnableUpgradeable,
    ERC2981Upgradeable,
    PaymentSplitterUpgradeable,
    OperatorFiltererUpgradeable
{
    string public _baseTokenURI;
    SaleState public saleState;
    BaseSettings public baseSettings;
    uint256 public maxSupply;
    address[] public withdrawAddresses;
    mapping(address => mapping(uint256 => uint64)) private amountMintedForPhase;
    bool public isPublicActive;
    bool private allowBurning;
    event TokensMinted(address indexed to, uint256 quantity);
    event TokenBurned(address indexed owner, uint256 tokenId);
    event TokensAirdropped(uint256 numRecipients, uint256 numTokens);
    event PhasesActivated(uint256[] phaseIds, bool activatedPublic);
    event PhasesPaused(uint256[] phaseIds, bool pausedPublic);
    event PhaseEnded(uint256 phaseIds);
    event BurnStatusChanged(bool burnActive);
    event PhaseSettingsUpdated(uint256 phaseId, PhaseSettings settings);
    event BaseSettingsUpdated(BaseSettings settings);
    event BaseURIUpdated(string baseURI);
    event RoyaltyUpdated(address royaltyAddress, uint96 royaltyAmount);
    /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
    constructor() {
        _disableInitializers();
    }
    function initialize(
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _baseUri,
        RoyaltySettings calldata _royaltySettings,
        PhaseSettings[] calldata _phases,
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings,
        PaymentSplitterSettings calldata _paymentSplitterSettings,
        uint256 _maxIntendedSupply,
        bool _allowBurning,
        address _deployer,
        address _operatorFilter
    ) public initializerERC721A initializer {
        __ERC721A_init(_name, _symbol);
        __Ownable_init();
        __PaymentSplitter_init(
            _paymentSplitterSettings.payees,
            _paymentSplitterSettings.shares
        );
        uint64 numPhases = uint64(_phases.length);
        uint256 supplyValidationCount = _baseSettings.maxSupply;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            saleState.phases[i] = _phases[i];
            supplyValidationCount += _phases[i].maxSupply;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        require(
            supplyValidationCount == _maxIntendedSupply,
            "Supply of all phases must equal maxIntendedSupply"
        );
        _baseTokenURI = _baseUri;
        withdrawAddresses = _paymentSplitterSettings.payees;
        saleState.numPhases = numPhases;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        allowBurning = _allowBurning;
        maxSupply = _maxIntendedSupply;
        _setDefaultRoyalty(
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAddress,
            _royaltySettings.royaltyAmount
        );
        transferOwnership(_deployer);
        OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.__OperatorFilterer_init(
            _operatorFilter,
            _operatorFilter == address(0) ? false : true // only subscribe if a filter is provided
        );
    }
    // ========= EXTERNAL MINTING METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for an allowlisted phase
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that doesn't have an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhaseAllowlist(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64 quantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof
    ) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
            msg.sender,
            quantity,
            proof,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
        amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens for a non-allowlist phase.
     * @dev Calling this function for a phase that has an allowlist will fail
     */
    function mintPhase(uint256 phaseIndex, uint64 quantity) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
            msg.sender,
            quantity,
            phaseIndex,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
        amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in the public sale
     */
    function mintPublic(uint64 quantity) external payable {
        uint64 updatedAmountMinted = _checkPublicMintConditions(
            quantity,
            msg.value
        );
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, quantity);
        baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
        _mint(msg.sender, quantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Mint tokens in all possible phases (including public sale)
     */
    function mintBatch(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        bytes32[][] calldata proofs,
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        uint64 publicQuantity
    ) external payable {
        uint256 phaseLength = phaseIndices.length;
        if (
            phaseLength > saleState.numPhases ||
            phaseLength != quantities.length ||
            phaseLength != proofs.length
        ) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        uint256 balance = msg.value;
        uint256 quantityToMint;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseLength; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmount;
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            uint64 quantity = quantities[i];
            bytes32[] calldata proof = proofs[i];
            PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
            uint256 priceForPhase = phase.price * quantity;
            // Since price is strictly checked in the _check* functions below,
            // we have an additional check here to ensure that the balance doesn't underflow
            if (balance < priceForPhase) {
                revert InvalidPrice();
            }
            // if the phase has no allowlist, the merkleRoot will be zeroed out.
            if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
                updatedAmount = _checkPhaseMintConditions(
                    msg.sender,
                    quantity,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            } else {
                updatedAmount = _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
                    msg.sender,
                    quantity,
                    proof,
                    phaseIndex,
                    priceForPhase
                );
            }
            // quantity & phaseLength have a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            // balance underflow is checked above
            unchecked {
                saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted += quantity;
                amountMintedForPhase[msg.sender][phaseIndex] = updatedAmount;
                balance -= priceForPhase;
                quantityToMint += quantity;
                ++i;
            }
        }
        uint256 totalMintQuantity = quantityToMint;
        if (publicQuantity > 0) {
            _checkPublicMintConditions(publicQuantity, balance);
            // publicQuantity has a max value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                baseSettings.amountMinted += publicQuantity;
                totalMintQuantity += publicQuantity;
            }
        }
        _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        _mint(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
        emit TokensMinted(msg.sender, totalMintQuantity);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Burn a token, if the contract allows for it
     */
    function burn(uint256 tokenId) external {
        if (!allowBurning) {
            revert BurningNotAllowed();
        }
        _burn(tokenId, true);
        emit TokenBurned(msg.sender, tokenId);
    }
    // ========= OWNER METHODS =========
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for a particular phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the phase that is specified in the airdropper.
     */
    function airdropForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = phase.amountMinted + quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            phase.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Perform a batch airdrop for the public phase.
     * @dev Minted tokens are pulled from the public phase.
     */
    function airdropPublic(
        uint64[] calldata quantities,
        address[] calldata recipients
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numRecipients = recipients.length;
        uint256 totalAirdropped;
        if (numRecipients != quantities.length) revert InvalidAirdrop();
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numRecipients; ) {
            uint64 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted +
                quantities[i];
            if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
                revert SoldOut();
            }
            // airdrops are not subject to the per-wallet mint limits,
            // but we track how much is minted for the phase
            baseSettings.amountMinted = updatedAmountMinted;
            totalAirdropped += quantities[i];
            _mint(recipients[i], quantities[i]);
            // numRecipients has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        emit TokensAirdropped(numRecipients, totalAirdropped);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are active.
     * Public sale can be activated by setting `activatePublic` to true.
     */
    function activatePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool activatePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        // activate all the phases provided in phaseIndices
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndices[i]].isActive = true;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with activatePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be activated, but it does not pause it.
        if (activatePublic) {
            isPublicActive = true;
        }
        emit PhasesActivated(phaseIndices, activatePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Specify which phases are inactive (paused).
     * Public sale can be paused by setting `pausePublic` to true.
     * Pausing is separate from ending, since ending permanently closes the phase.
     */
    function pausePhases(
        uint256[] calldata phaseIndices,
        bool pausePublic
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numPhases = phaseIndices.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numPhases; ) {
            uint256 phaseIndex = phaseIndices[i];
            if (phaseIndex >= saleState.numPhases) {
                // phaseIndex is out of bounds
                revert InvalidPhase();
            }
            saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = false;
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        // calling this function with pausePublic=false only indicates the public sale
        // is not intended to be paused, but it does not pause it.
        if (pausePublic) {
            isPublicActive = false;
        }
        emit PhasesPaused(phaseIndices, pausePublic);
    }
    /**
     * @notice If enabled, the token can be burned, for approved operators.
     * @dev The burn method will revert unless this is enabled
     */
    function toggleBurning() external onlyOwner {
        allowBurning = !allowBurning;
        emit BurnStatusChanged(allowBurning);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Permanently closes a phase by capping the supply & releasing it
     */
    function endPhase(uint256 phaseIndex) public onlyOwner {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        // if the phase never had supply, there is nothing to do
        if (phase.maxSupply == 0) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        // transfer the remaining supply into the base settings (used for public sale accounting)
        baseSettings.maxSupply += phase.maxSupply - phase.amountMinted;
        // remove the supply from the phase
        phase.maxSupply = 0;
        emit PhaseEnded(phaseIndex);
    }
    function endPhases(uint64[] calldata phaseIndices) external onlyOwner {
        uint256 phaseIndicesLength = phaseIndices.length;
        // ensure that phaseIndices argument will only ever be as large as the number of phases
        if (phaseIndicesLength > saleState.numPhases) {
            revert InvalidPhase();
        }
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < phaseIndicesLength; ) {
            endPhase(phaseIndices[i]);
            // phaseIndicesLength has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the minting rules for a particular phase
     * @dev supply & amountMinted are not changeable
     */
    function updatePhaseSettings(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        PhaseSettings calldata phase
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted;
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply;
        bool existingStatus = saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex] = phase;
        // ensure that the amountMinted, maxSupply, and status values cannot be set
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        saleState.phases[phaseIndex].isActive = existingStatus;
        emit PhaseSettingsUpdated(phaseIndex, phase);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Updates the the base minting settings
     * The global maxPerWallet setting applies to all phases
     * Pricing and other fields will apply to the public sale
     *
     * @dev maxSupply & amountMinted are not changeable
     */
    function updateBaseSettings(
        BaseSettings calldata _baseSettings
    ) external onlyOwner {
        uint64 existingMaxSupply = baseSettings.maxSupply;
        uint64 existingAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted;
        baseSettings = _baseSettings;
        // ensure that the maxSupply & amountMinted value cannot be set
        baseSettings.maxSupply = existingMaxSupply;
        baseSettings.amountMinted = existingAmountMinted;
        emit BaseSettingsUpdated(_baseSettings);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Payment can be pulled via PaymentSplitter.release
     * this method is provided for convenience to release all payee funds
     */
    function withdraw() external onlyOwner {
        uint256 numAddresses = withdrawAddresses.length;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < numAddresses; ) {
            address payable withdrawAddress = payable(withdrawAddresses[i]);
            if (releasable(withdrawAddress) > 0) {
                release(withdrawAddress);
            }
            // numAddresses has a maximum value of 2^256 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }
    function setBaseURI(string memory baseURI) external onlyOwner {
        _baseTokenURI = baseURI;
        emit BaseURIUpdated(baseURI);
    }
    function setRoyaltyInfo(
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeBasisPoints
    ) external onlyOwner {
        _setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
        emit RoyaltyUpdated(receiver, feeBasisPoints);
    }
    // ========= VIEW METHODS =========
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        return 1;
    }
    function _checkAllowlistPhaseMintConditions(
        address wallet,
        uint64 quantity,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // there should be a valid merkle root for the phase
        if (phase.merkleRoot == bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        if (
            !MerkleProof.verify(
                proof,
                phase.merkleRoot,
                keccak256(abi.encodePacked(wallet))
            )
        ) {
            revert InvalidProof();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        // phases can have a maxPerWallet
        if (
            phase.maxPerWallet > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPhaseMintConditions(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        PhaseSettings storage phase = saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
        if (!phase.isActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        // the phase should not have a merkleRoot
        if (phase.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            revert InvalidMintFunction();
        }
        if (phase.amountMinted + quantity > phase.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * phase.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        uint256 amountMinted = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = amountMinted + quantity;
        // phases can have a maxPerWallet
        if (
            phase.maxPerWallet > 0 && updatedAmountMinted > phase.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkPublicMintConditions(
        uint256 quantity,
        uint256 balance
    ) internal view returns (uint64) {
        if (!isPublicActive) {
            revert PhaseNotActive();
        }
        uint256 updatedAmountMinted = baseSettings.amountMinted + quantity;
        if (updatedAmountMinted > baseSettings.maxSupply) {
            revert SoldOut();
        }
        if (balance != quantity * baseSettings.price) {
            revert InvalidPrice();
        }
        return uint64(updatedAmountMinted);
    }
    function _checkGlobalPerWalletMax(
        address wallet,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal view {
        if (
            baseSettings.maxPerWallet > 0 &&
            _numberMinted(wallet) + quantity > baseSettings.maxPerWallet
        ) {
            revert ExceedMaxPerWallet();
        }
    }
    function getDataForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex
    ) external view returns (PhaseSettings memory) {
        return saleState.phases[phaseIndex];
    }
    function getMintBalance(address wallet) external view returns (uint256) {
        return _numberMinted(wallet);
    }
    function getAmountMintedForPhase(
        uint256 phaseIndex,
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint64) {
        return amountMintedForPhase[wallet][phaseIndex];
    }
    function getAmountMintedForOwner(
        address wallet
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory) {
        uint256[] memory amountMintedPerPhase = new uint256[](
            saleState.numPhases + 1
        );
        for (uint64 i = 0; i < saleState.numPhases; ) {
            amountMintedPerPhase[i] = amountMintedForPhase[wallet][i];
            // numPhases has a maximum value of 2^64 - 1
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        amountMintedPerPhase[saleState.numPhases] = _numberMinted(wallet);
        return amountMintedPerPhase;
    }
    /**
     * @dev See {ERC721-_baseURI}.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _baseTokenURI;
    }
    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    )
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(IERC721AUpgradeable, ERC721AUpgradeable, ERC2981Upgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return
            ERC721AUpgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            ERC2981Upgradeable.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
    // ========= OPERATOR FILTERER OVERRIDES =========
    function setApprovalForAll(
        address operator,
        bool approved
    )
        public
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.setApprovalForAll(operator, approved);
    }
    function approve(
        address operator,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.approve(operator, tokenId);
    }
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory data
    )
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperator(from)
    {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, data);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.17;
error InvalidPrice();
error SoldOut();
error ExceedMaxPerWallet();
error InvalidProof();
error InvalidMintFunction();
error InvalidAirdrop();
error BurningNotAllowed();
struct PaymentSplitterSettings {
    address[] payees;
    uint256[] shares;
}
struct RoyaltySettings {
    address royaltyAddress;
    uint96 royaltyAmount;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable diamond facet contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 */
import {ERC721A__InitializableStorage} from './ERC721A__InitializableStorage.sol';
abstract contract ERC721A__Initializable {
    using ERC721A__InitializableStorage for ERC721A__InitializableStorage.Layout;
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initializer function from being invoked twice.
     */
    modifier initializerERC721A() {
        // If the contract is initializing we ignore whether _initialized is set in order to support multiple
        // inheritance patterns, but we only do this in the context of a constructor, because in other contexts the
        // contract may have been reentered.
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing
                ? _isConstructor()
                : !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is already initialized'
        );
        bool isTopLevelCall = !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = true;
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} modifier, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializingERC721A() {
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing,
            'ERC721A__Initializable: contract is not initializing'
        );
        _;
    }
    /// @dev Returns true if and only if the function is running in the constructor
    function _isConstructor() private view returns (bool) {
        // extcodesize checks the size of the code stored in an address, and
        // address returns the current address. Since the code is still not
        // deployed when running a constructor, any checks on its code size will
        // yield zero, making it an effective way to detect if a contract is
        // under construction or not.
        address self = address(this);
        uint256 cs;
        assembly {
            cs := extcodesize(self)
        }
        return cs == 0;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base storage for the  initialization function for upgradeable diamond facet contracts
 **/
library ERC721A__InitializableStorage {
    struct Layout {
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         */
        bool _initialized;
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool _initializing;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.initializable.facet');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
library ERC721AStorage {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }
    struct Layout {
        // =============================================================
        //                            STORAGE
        // =============================================================
        // The next token ID to be minted.
        uint256 _currentIndex;
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 _burnCounter;
        // Token name
        string _name;
        // Token symbol
        string _symbol;
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
        // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..159]   `addr`
        // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
        // - [224]      `burned`
        // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
        // - [232..255] `extraData`
        mapping(uint256 => uint256) _packedOwnerships;
        // Mapping owner address to address data.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..63]    `balance`
        // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
        // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
        // - [192..255] `aux`
        mapping(address => uint256) _packedAddressData;
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
        mapping(uint256 => ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef) _tokenApprovals;
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) _operatorApprovals;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256('ERC721A.contracts.storage.ERC721A');
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import {ERC721AStorage} from './ERC721AStorage.sol';
import './ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}
/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721AUpgradeable is ERC721A__Initializable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
    using ERC721AStorage for ERC721AStorage.Layout;
    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================
    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;
    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;
    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;
    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;
    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;
    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;
    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;
    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;
    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;
    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;
    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;
    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;
    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================
    function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
    }
    function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._name = name_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol = symbol_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = _startTokenId();
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID.
     * To change the starting token ID, please override this function.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) revert BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }
    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._name;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : '';
    }
    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return '';
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index]);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }
    /**
     * Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256 packed) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];
            // If not burned.
            if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) {
                // If the data at the starting slot does not exist, start the scan.
                if (packed == 0) {
                    if (tokenId >= ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
                    // Invariant:
                    // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // before an unintialized ownership slot
                    // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                    // Hence, `tokenId` will not underflow.
                    //
                    // We can directly compare the packed value.
                    // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                    for (;;) {
                        unchecked {
                            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[--tokenId];
                        }
                        if (packed == 0) continue;
                        return packed;
                    }
                }
                // Otherwise, the data exists and is not burned. We can skip the scan.
                // This is possible because we have already achieved the target condition.
                // This saves 2143 gas on transfers of initialized tokens.
                return packed;
            }
        }
        revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account. See {ERC721A-_approve}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        _approve(to, tokenId, true);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return
            _startTokenId() <= tokenId &&
            tokenId < ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex && // If within bounds,
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0; // and not burned.
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) revert TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        if (to == address(0)) revert TransferToZeroAddress();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, to, tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '');
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try
            ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data)
        returns (bytes4 retval) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            } else {
                assembly {
                    revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                }
            }
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            uint256 toMasked;
            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;
            // Use assembly to loop and emit the `Transfer` event for gas savings.
            // The duplicated `log4` removes an extra check and reduces stack juggling.
            // The assembly, together with the surrounding Solidity code, have been
            // delicately arranged to nudge the compiler into producing optimized opcodes.
            assembly {
                // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
                toMasked := and(to, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
                // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                log4(
                    0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                    0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                    _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                    0, // `address(0)`.
                    toMasked, // `to`.
                    startTokenId // `tokenId`.
                )
                // The `iszero(eq(,))` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
                // The compiler will optimize the `iszero` away for performance.
                for {
                    let tokenId := add(startTokenId, 1)
                } iszero(eq(tokenId, end)) {
                    tokenId := add(tokenId, 1)
                } {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event. Similar to above.
                    log4(0, 0, _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, 0, toMasked, tokenId)
                }
            }
            if (toMasked == 0) revert MintToZeroAddress();
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) revert MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);
        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // Reentrancy protection.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex != end) revert();
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, '');
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_approve(to, tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _approve(to, tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function _approve(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bool approvalCheck
    ) internal virtual {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck)
            if (_msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
                if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                    revert ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
                }
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        }
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
        unchecked {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter++;
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) revert OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)
            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str
            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }
            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import './IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
import '../ERC721A__Initializable.sol';
/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is
    ERC721A__Initializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        TokenOwnership memory ownership;
        if (tokenId < _startTokenId() || tokenId >= _nextTokenId()) {
            return ownership;
        }
        ownership = _ownershipAt(tokenId);
        if (ownership.burned) {
            return ownership;
        }
        return _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] calldata tokenIds)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership[] memory)
    {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = tokenIds.length;
            TokenOwnership[] memory ownerships = new TokenOwnership[](tokenIdsLength);
            for (uint256 i; i != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownerships[i] = explicitOwnershipOf(tokenIds[i]);
            }
            return ownerships;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) revert InvalidQueryRange();
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            uint256 stopLimit = _nextTokenId();
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) {
                start = _startTokenId();
            }
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop > stopLimit) {
                stop = stopLimit;
            }
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), stop - start)`,
            // to cater for cases where `balanceOf(owner)` is too big.
            if (start < stop) {
                uint256 rangeLength = stop - start;
                if (rangeLength < tokenIdsMaxLength) {
                    tokenIdsMaxLength = rangeLength;
                }
            } else {
                tokenIdsMaxLength = 0;
            }
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsMaxLength);
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength == 0) {
                return tokenIds;
            }
            // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
            // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
            TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned), initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
            // `ownership.address` will not be zero, as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
            if (!ownership.burned) {
                currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
            }
            for (uint256 i = start; i != stop && tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsMaxLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            // Downsize the array to fit.
            assembly {
                mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = balanceOf(owner);
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsLength);
            TokenOwnership memory ownership;
            for (uint256 i = _startTokenId(); tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import '../IERC721AUpgradeable.sol';
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] memory tokenIds) external view returns (TokenOwnership[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================
    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);
    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
interface IOperatorFilterRegistry {
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function register(address registrant) external;
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external;
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function unregister(address addr) external;
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered) external;
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codehash, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered) external;
    function subscribe(address registrant, address registrantToSubscribe) external;
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external;
    function subscriptionOf(address addr) external returns (address registrant);
    function subscribers(address registrant) external returns (address[] memory);
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external returns (bool);
    function filteredOperators(address addr) external returns (address[] memory);
    function filteredCodeHashes(address addr) external returns (bytes32[] memory);
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (bytes32);
    function isRegistered(address addr) external returns (bool);
    function codeHashOf(address addr) external returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {IOperatorFilterRegistry} from "../IOperatorFilterRegistry.sol";
import {Initializable} from "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
abstract contract OperatorFiltererUpgradeable is Initializable {
    error OperatorNotAllowed(address operator);
    IOperatorFilterRegistry constant operatorFilterRegistry =
        IOperatorFilterRegistry(0x000000000000AAeB6D7670E522A718067333cd4E);
    function __OperatorFilterer_init(address subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, bool subscribe)
        internal
        onlyInitializing
    {
        // If an inheriting token contract is deployed to a network without the registry deployed, the modifier
        // will not revert, but the contract will need to be registered with the registry once it is deployed in
        // order for the modifier to filter addresses.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isRegistered(address(this))) {
                if (subscribe) {
                    operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndSubscribe(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                } else {
                    if (subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy != address(0)) {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.registerAndCopyEntries(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                    } else {
                        operatorFilterRegistry.register(address(this));
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperator(address from) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            // Allow spending tokens from addresses with balance
            // Note that this still allows listings and marketplaces with escrow to transfer tokens if transferred
            // from an EOA.
            if (from == msg.sender) {
                _;
                return;
            }
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), msg.sender)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(msg.sender);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(address operator) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (address(operatorFilterRegistry).code.length > 0) {
            if (!operatorFilterRegistry.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), operator)) {
                revert OperatorNotAllowed(operator);
            }
        }
        _;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
import "./base/ModuleManager.sol";
import "./base/OwnerManager.sol";
import "./base/FallbackManager.sol";
import "./base/GuardManager.sol";
import "./common/EtherPaymentFallback.sol";
import "./common/Singleton.sol";
import "./common/SignatureDecoder.sol";
import "./common/SecuredTokenTransfer.sol";
import "./common/StorageAccessible.sol";
import "./interfaces/ISignatureValidator.sol";
import "./external/GnosisSafeMath.sol";
/// @title Gnosis Safe - A multisignature wallet with support for confirmations using signed messages based on ERC191.
/// @author Stefan George - <stefan@gnosis.io>
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.io>
contract GnosisSafe is
    EtherPaymentFallback,
    Singleton,
    ModuleManager,
    OwnerManager,
    SignatureDecoder,
    SecuredTokenTransfer,
    ISignatureValidatorConstants,
    FallbackManager,
    StorageAccessible,
    GuardManager
{
    using GnosisSafeMath for uint256;
    string public constant VERSION = "1.3.0";
    // keccak256(
    //     "EIP712Domain(uint256 chainId,address verifyingContract)"
    // );
    bytes32 private constant DOMAIN_SEPARATOR_TYPEHASH = 0x47e79534a245952e8b16893a336b85a3d9ea9fa8c573f3d803afb92a79469218;
    // keccak256(
    //     "SafeTx(address to,uint256 value,bytes data,uint8 operation,uint256 safeTxGas,uint256 baseGas,uint256 gasPrice,address gasToken,address refundReceiver,uint256 nonce)"
    // );
    bytes32 private constant SAFE_TX_TYPEHASH = 0xbb8310d486368db6bd6f849402fdd73ad53d316b5a4b2644ad6efe0f941286d8;
    event SafeSetup(address indexed initiator, address[] owners, uint256 threshold, address initializer, address fallbackHandler);
    event ApproveHash(bytes32 indexed approvedHash, address indexed owner);
    event SignMsg(bytes32 indexed msgHash);
    event ExecutionFailure(bytes32 txHash, uint256 payment);
    event ExecutionSuccess(bytes32 txHash, uint256 payment);
    uint256 public nonce;
    bytes32 private _deprecatedDomainSeparator;
    // Mapping to keep track of all message hashes that have been approve by ALL REQUIRED owners
    mapping(bytes32 => uint256) public signedMessages;
    // Mapping to keep track of all hashes (message or transaction) that have been approve by ANY owners
    mapping(address => mapping(bytes32 => uint256)) public approvedHashes;
    // This constructor ensures that this contract can only be used as a master copy for Proxy contracts
    constructor() {
        // By setting the threshold it is not possible to call setup anymore,
        // so we create a Safe with 0 owners and threshold 1.
        // This is an unusable Safe, perfect for the singleton
        threshold = 1;
    }
    /// @dev Setup function sets initial storage of contract.
    /// @param _owners List of Safe owners.
    /// @param _threshold Number of required confirmations for a Safe transaction.
    /// @param to Contract address for optional delegate call.
    /// @param data Data payload for optional delegate call.
    /// @param fallbackHandler Handler for fallback calls to this contract
    /// @param paymentToken Token that should be used for the payment (0 is ETH)
    /// @param payment Value that should be paid
    /// @param paymentReceiver Adddress that should receive the payment (or 0 if tx.origin)
    function setup(
        address[] calldata _owners,
        uint256 _threshold,
        address to,
        bytes calldata data,
        address fallbackHandler,
        address paymentToken,
        uint256 payment,
        address payable paymentReceiver
    ) external {
        // setupOwners checks if the Threshold is already set, therefore preventing that this method is called twice
        setupOwners(_owners, _threshold);
        if (fallbackHandler != address(0)) internalSetFallbackHandler(fallbackHandler);
        // As setupOwners can only be called if the contract has not been initialized we don't need a check for setupModules
        setupModules(to, data);
        if (payment > 0) {
            // To avoid running into issues with EIP-170 we reuse the handlePayment function (to avoid adjusting code of that has been verified we do not adjust the method itself)
            // baseGas = 0, gasPrice = 1 and gas = payment => amount = (payment + 0) * 1 = payment
            handlePayment(payment, 0, 1, paymentToken, paymentReceiver);
        }
        emit SafeSetup(msg.sender, _owners, _threshold, to, fallbackHandler);
    }
    /// @dev Allows to execute a Safe transaction confirmed by required number of owners and then pays the account that submitted the transaction.
    ///      Note: The fees are always transferred, even if the user transaction fails.
    /// @param to Destination address of Safe transaction.
    /// @param value Ether value of Safe transaction.
    /// @param data Data payload of Safe transaction.
    /// @param operation Operation type of Safe transaction.
    /// @param safeTxGas Gas that should be used for the Safe transaction.
    /// @param baseGas Gas costs that are independent of the transaction execution(e.g. base transaction fee, signature check, payment of the refund)
    /// @param gasPrice Gas price that should be used for the payment calculation.
    /// @param gasToken Token address (or 0 if ETH) that is used for the payment.
    /// @param refundReceiver Address of receiver of gas payment (or 0 if tx.origin).
    /// @param signatures Packed signature data ({bytes32 r}{bytes32 s}{uint8 v})
    function execTransaction(
        address to,
        uint256 value,
        bytes calldata data,
        Enum.Operation operation,
        uint256 safeTxGas,
        uint256 baseGas,
        uint256 gasPrice,
        address gasToken,
        address payable refundReceiver,
        bytes memory signatures
    ) public payable virtual returns (bool success) {
        bytes32 txHash;
        // Use scope here to limit variable lifetime and prevent `stack too deep` errors
        {
            bytes memory txHashData =
                encodeTransactionData(
                    // Transaction info
                    to,
                    value,
                    data,
                    operation,
                    safeTxGas,
                    // Payment info
                    baseGas,
                    gasPrice,
                    gasToken,
                    refundReceiver,
                    // Signature info
                    nonce
                );
            // Increase nonce and execute transaction.
            nonce++;
            txHash = keccak256(txHashData);
            checkSignatures(txHash, txHashData, signatures);
        }
        address guard = getGuard();
        {
            if (guard != address(0)) {
                Guard(guard).checkTransaction(
                    // Transaction info
                    to,
                    value,
                    data,
                    operation,
                    safeTxGas,
                    // Payment info
                    baseGas,
                    gasPrice,
                    gasToken,
                    refundReceiver,
                    // Signature info
                    signatures,
                    msg.sender
                );
            }
        }
        // We require some gas to emit the events (at least 2500) after the execution and some to perform code until the execution (500)
        // We also include the 1/64 in the check that is not send along with a call to counteract potential shortings because of EIP-150
        require(gasleft() >= ((safeTxGas * 64) / 63).max(safeTxGas + 2500) + 500, "GS010");
        // Use scope here to limit variable lifetime and prevent `stack too deep` errors
        {
            uint256 gasUsed = gasleft();
            // If the gasPrice is 0 we assume that nearly all available gas can be used (it is always more than safeTxGas)
            // We only substract 2500 (compared to the 3000 before) to ensure that the amount passed is still higher than safeTxGas
            success = execute(to, value, data, operation, gasPrice == 0 ? (gasleft() - 2500) : safeTxGas);
            gasUsed = gasUsed.sub(gasleft());
            // If no safeTxGas and no gasPrice was set (e.g. both are 0), then the internal tx is required to be successful
            // This makes it possible to use `estimateGas` without issues, as it searches for the minimum gas where the tx doesn't revert
            require(success || safeTxGas != 0 || gasPrice != 0, "GS013");
            // We transfer the calculated tx costs to the tx.origin to avoid sending it to intermediate contracts that have made calls
            uint256 payment = 0;
            if (gasPrice > 0) {
                payment = handlePayment(gasUsed, baseGas, gasPrice, gasToken, refundReceiver);
            }
            if (success) emit ExecutionSuccess(txHash, payment);
            else emit ExecutionFailure(txHash, payment);
        }
        {
            if (guard != address(0)) {
                Guard(guard).checkAfterExecution(txHash, success);
            }
        }
    }
    function handlePayment(
        uint256 gasUsed,
        uint256 baseGas,
        uint256 gasPrice,
        address gasToken,
        address payable refundReceiver
    ) private returns (uint256 payment) {
        // solhint-disable-next-line avoid-tx-origin
        address payable receiver = refundReceiver == address(0) ? payable(tx.origin) : refundReceiver;
        if (gasToken == address(0)) {
            // For ETH we will only adjust the gas price to not be higher than the actual used gas price
            payment = gasUsed.add(baseGas).mul(gasPrice < tx.gasprice ? gasPrice : tx.gasprice);
            require(receiver.send(payment), "GS011");
        } else {
            payment = gasUsed.add(baseGas).mul(gasPrice);
            require(transferToken(gasToken, receiver, payment), "GS012");
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Checks whether the signature provided is valid for the provided data, hash. Will revert otherwise.
     * @param dataHash Hash of the data (could be either a message hash or transaction hash)
     * @param data That should be signed (this is passed to an external validator contract)
     * @param signatures Signature data that should be verified. Can be ECDSA signature, contract signature (EIP-1271) or approved hash.
     */
    function checkSignatures(
        bytes32 dataHash,
        bytes memory data,
        bytes memory signatures
    ) public view {
        // Load threshold to avoid multiple storage loads
        uint256 _threshold = threshold;
        // Check that a threshold is set
        require(_threshold > 0, "GS001");
        checkNSignatures(dataHash, data, signatures, _threshold);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Checks whether the signature provided is valid for the provided data, hash. Will revert otherwise.
     * @param dataHash Hash of the data (could be either a message hash or transaction hash)
     * @param data That should be signed (this is passed to an external validator contract)
     * @param signatures Signature data that should be verified. Can be ECDSA signature, contract signature (EIP-1271) or approved hash.
     * @param requiredSignatures Amount of required valid signatures.
     */
    function checkNSignatures(
        bytes32 dataHash,
        bytes memory data,
        bytes memory signatures,
        uint256 requiredSignatures
    ) public view {
        // Check that the provided signature data is not too short
        require(signatures.length >= requiredSignatures.mul(65), "GS020");
        // There cannot be an owner with address 0.
        address lastOwner = address(0);
        address currentOwner;
        uint8 v;
        bytes32 r;
        bytes32 s;
        uint256 i;
        for (i = 0; i < requiredSignatures; i++) {
            (v, r, s) = signatureSplit(signatures, i);
            if (v == 0) {
                // If v is 0 then it is a contract signature
                // When handling contract signatures the address of the contract is encoded into r
                currentOwner = address(uint160(uint256(r)));
                // Check that signature data pointer (s) is not pointing inside the static part of the signatures bytes
                // This check is not completely accurate, since it is possible that more signatures than the threshold are send.
                // Here we only check that the pointer is not pointing inside the part that is being processed
                require(uint256(s) >= requiredSignatures.mul(65), "GS021");
                // Check that signature data pointer (s) is in bounds (points to the length of data -> 32 bytes)
                require(uint256(s).add(32) <= signatures.length, "GS022");
                // Check if the contract signature is in bounds: start of data is s + 32 and end is start + signature length
                uint256 contractSignatureLen;
                // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
                assembly {
                    contractSignatureLen := mload(add(add(signatures, s), 0x20))
                }
                require(uint256(s).add(32).add(contractSignatureLen) <= signatures.length, "GS023");
                // Check signature
                bytes memory contractSignature;
                // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
                assembly {
                    // The signature data for contract signatures is appended to the concatenated signatures and the offset is stored in s
                    contractSignature := add(add(signatures, s), 0x20)
                }
                require(ISignatureValidator(currentOwner).isValidSignature(data, contractSignature) == EIP1271_MAGIC_VALUE, "GS024");
            } else if (v == 1) {
                // If v is 1 then it is an approved hash
                // When handling approved hashes the address of the approver is encoded into r
                currentOwner = address(uint160(uint256(r)));
                // Hashes are automatically approved by the sender of the message or when they have been pre-approved via a separate transaction
                require(msg.sender == currentOwner || approvedHashes[currentOwner][dataHash] != 0, "GS025");
            } else if (v > 30) {
                // If v > 30 then default va (27,28) has been adjusted for eth_sign flow
                // To support eth_sign and similar we adjust v and hash the messageHash with the Ethereum message prefix before applying ecrecover
                currentOwner = ecrecover(keccak256(abi.encodePacked("\\x19Ethereum Signed Message:\
32", dataHash)), v - 4, r, s);
            } else {
                // Default is the ecrecover flow with the provided data hash
                // Use ecrecover with the messageHash for EOA signatures
                currentOwner = ecrecover(dataHash, v, r, s);
            }
            require(currentOwner > lastOwner && owners[currentOwner] != address(0) && currentOwner != SENTINEL_OWNERS, "GS026");
            lastOwner = currentOwner;
        }
    }
    /// @dev Allows to estimate a Safe transaction.
    ///      This method is only meant for estimation purpose, therefore the call will always revert and encode the result in the revert data.
    ///      Since the `estimateGas` function includes refunds, call this method to get an estimated of the costs that are deducted from the safe with `execTransaction`
    /// @param to Destination address of Safe transaction.
    /// @param value Ether value of Safe transaction.
    /// @param data Data payload of Safe transaction.
    /// @param operation Operation type of Safe transaction.
    /// @return Estimate without refunds and overhead fees (base transaction and payload data gas costs).
    /// @notice Deprecated in favor of common/StorageAccessible.sol and will be removed in next version.
    function requiredTxGas(
        address to,
        uint256 value,
        bytes calldata data,
        Enum.Operation operation
    ) external returns (uint256) {
        uint256 startGas = gasleft();
        // We don't provide an error message here, as we use it to return the estimate
        require(execute(to, value, data, operation, gasleft()));
        uint256 requiredGas = startGas - gasleft();
        // Convert response to string and return via error message
        revert(string(abi.encodePacked(requiredGas)));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Marks a hash as approved. This can be used to validate a hash that is used by a signature.
     * @param hashToApprove The hash that should be marked as approved for signatures that are verified by this contract.
     */
    function approveHash(bytes32 hashToApprove) external {
        require(owners[msg.sender] != address(0), "GS030");
        approvedHashes[msg.sender][hashToApprove] = 1;
        emit ApproveHash(hashToApprove, msg.sender);
    }
    /// @dev Returns the chain id used by this contract.
    function getChainId() public view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 id;
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            id := chainid()
        }
        return id;
    }
    function domainSeparator() public view returns (bytes32) {
        return keccak256(abi.encode(DOMAIN_SEPARATOR_TYPEHASH, getChainId(), this));
    }
    /// @dev Returns the bytes that are hashed to be signed by owners.
    /// @param to Destination address.
    /// @param value Ether value.
    /// @param data Data payload.
    /// @param operation Operation type.
    /// @param safeTxGas Gas that should be used for the safe transaction.
    /// @param baseGas Gas costs for that are independent of the transaction execution(e.g. base transaction fee, signature check, payment of the refund)
    /// @param gasPrice Maximum gas price that should be used for this transaction.
    /// @param gasToken Token address (or 0 if ETH) that is used for the payment.
    /// @param refundReceiver Address of receiver of gas payment (or 0 if tx.origin).
    /// @param _nonce Transaction nonce.
    /// @return Transaction hash bytes.
    function encodeTransactionData(
        address to,
        uint256 value,
        bytes calldata data,
        Enum.Operation operation,
        uint256 safeTxGas,
        uint256 baseGas,
        uint256 gasPrice,
        address gasToken,
        address refundReceiver,
        uint256 _nonce
    ) public view returns (bytes memory) {
        bytes32 safeTxHash =
            keccak256(
                abi.encode(
                    SAFE_TX_TYPEHASH,
                    to,
                    value,
                    keccak256(data),
                    operation,
                    safeTxGas,
                    baseGas,
                    gasPrice,
                    gasToken,
                    refundReceiver,
                    _nonce
                )
            );
        return abi.encodePacked(bytes1(0x19), bytes1(0x01), domainSeparator(), safeTxHash);
    }
    /// @dev Returns hash to be signed by owners.
    /// @param to Destination address.
    /// @param value Ether value.
    /// @param data Data payload.
    /// @param operation Operation type.
    /// @param safeTxGas Fas that should be used for the safe transaction.
    /// @param baseGas Gas costs for data used to trigger the safe transaction.
    /// @param gasPrice Maximum gas price that should be used for this transaction.
    /// @param gasToken Token address (or 0 if ETH) that is used for the payment.
    /// @param refundReceiver Address of receiver of gas payment (or 0 if tx.origin).
    /// @param _nonce Transaction nonce.
    /// @return Transaction hash.
    function getTransactionHash(
        address to,
        uint256 value,
        bytes calldata data,
        Enum.Operation operation,
        uint256 safeTxGas,
        uint256 baseGas,
        uint256 gasPrice,
        address gasToken,
        address refundReceiver,
        uint256 _nonce
    ) public view returns (bytes32) {
        return keccak256(encodeTransactionData(to, value, data, operation, safeTxGas, baseGas, gasPrice, gasToken, refundReceiver, _nonce));
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
import "../common/Enum.sol";
/// @title Executor - A contract that can execute transactions
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.pm>
contract Executor {
    function execute(
        address to,
        uint256 value,
        bytes memory data,
        Enum.Operation operation,
        uint256 txGas
    ) internal returns (bool success) {
        if (operation == Enum.Operation.DelegateCall) {
            // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
            assembly {
                success := delegatecall(txGas, to, add(data, 0x20), mload(data), 0, 0)
            }
        } else {
            // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
            assembly {
                success := call(txGas, to, value, add(data, 0x20), mload(data), 0, 0)
            }
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
import "../common/SelfAuthorized.sol";
/// @title Fallback Manager - A contract that manages fallback calls made to this contract
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.pm>
contract FallbackManager is SelfAuthorized {
    event ChangedFallbackHandler(address handler);
    // keccak256("fallback_manager.handler.address")
    bytes32 internal constant FALLBACK_HANDLER_STORAGE_SLOT = 0x6c9a6c4a39284e37ed1cf53d337577d14212a4870fb976a4366c693b939918d5;
    function internalSetFallbackHandler(address handler) internal {
        bytes32 slot = FALLBACK_HANDLER_STORAGE_SLOT;
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            sstore(slot, handler)
        }
    }
    /// @dev Allows to add a contract to handle fallback calls.
    ///      Only fallback calls without value and with data will be forwarded.
    ///      This can only be done via a Safe transaction.
    /// @param handler contract to handle fallbacks calls.
    function setFallbackHandler(address handler) public authorized {
        internalSetFallbackHandler(handler);
        emit ChangedFallbackHandler(handler);
    }
    // solhint-disable-next-line payable-fallback,no-complex-fallback
    fallback() external {
        bytes32 slot = FALLBACK_HANDLER_STORAGE_SLOT;
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            let handler := sload(slot)
            if iszero(handler) {
                return(0, 0)
            }
            calldatacopy(0, 0, calldatasize())
            // The msg.sender address is shifted to the left by 12 bytes to remove the padding
            // Then the address without padding is stored right after the calldata
            mstore(calldatasize(), shl(96, caller()))
            // Add 20 bytes for the address appended add the end
            let success := call(gas(), handler, 0, 0, add(calldatasize(), 20), 0, 0)
            returndatacopy(0, 0, returndatasize())
            if iszero(success) {
                revert(0, returndatasize())
            }
            return(0, returndatasize())
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
import "../common/Enum.sol";
import "../common/SelfAuthorized.sol";
interface Guard {
    function checkTransaction(
        address to,
        uint256 value,
        bytes memory data,
        Enum.Operation operation,
        uint256 safeTxGas,
        uint256 baseGas,
        uint256 gasPrice,
        address gasToken,
        address payable refundReceiver,
        bytes memory signatures,
        address msgSender
    ) external;
    function checkAfterExecution(bytes32 txHash, bool success) external;
}
/// @title Fallback Manager - A contract that manages fallback calls made to this contract
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.pm>
contract GuardManager is SelfAuthorized {
    event ChangedGuard(address guard);
    // keccak256("guard_manager.guard.address")
    bytes32 internal constant GUARD_STORAGE_SLOT = 0x4a204f620c8c5ccdca3fd54d003badd85ba500436a431f0cbda4f558c93c34c8;
    /// @dev Set a guard that checks transactions before execution
    /// @param guard The address of the guard to be used or the 0 address to disable the guard
    function setGuard(address guard) external authorized {
        bytes32 slot = GUARD_STORAGE_SLOT;
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            sstore(slot, guard)
        }
        emit ChangedGuard(guard);
    }
    function getGuard() internal view returns (address guard) {
        bytes32 slot = GUARD_STORAGE_SLOT;
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            guard := sload(slot)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
import "../common/Enum.sol";
import "../common/SelfAuthorized.sol";
import "./Executor.sol";
/// @title Module Manager - A contract that manages modules that can execute transactions via this contract
/// @author Stefan George - <stefan@gnosis.pm>
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.pm>
contract ModuleManager is SelfAuthorized, Executor {
    event EnabledModule(address module);
    event DisabledModule(address module);
    event ExecutionFromModuleSuccess(address indexed module);
    event ExecutionFromModuleFailure(address indexed module);
    address internal constant SENTINEL_MODULES = address(0x1);
    mapping(address => address) internal modules;
    function setupModules(address to, bytes memory data) internal {
        require(modules[SENTINEL_MODULES] == address(0), "GS100");
        modules[SENTINEL_MODULES] = SENTINEL_MODULES;
        if (to != address(0))
            // Setup has to complete successfully or transaction fails.
            require(execute(to, 0, data, Enum.Operation.DelegateCall, gasleft()), "GS000");
    }
    /// @dev Allows to add a module to the whitelist.
    ///      This can only be done via a Safe transaction.
    /// @notice Enables the module `module` for the Safe.
    /// @param module Module to be whitelisted.
    function enableModule(address module) public authorized {
        // Module address cannot be null or sentinel.
        require(module != address(0) && module != SENTINEL_MODULES, "GS101");
        // Module cannot be added twice.
        require(modules[module] == address(0), "GS102");
        modules[module] = modules[SENTINEL_MODULES];
        modules[SENTINEL_MODULES] = module;
        emit EnabledModule(module);
    }
    /// @dev Allows to remove a module from the whitelist.
    ///      This can only be done via a Safe transaction.
    /// @notice Disables the module `module` for the Safe.
    /// @param prevModule Module that pointed to the module to be removed in the linked list
    /// @param module Module to be removed.
    function disableModule(address prevModule, address module) public authorized {
        // Validate module address and check that it corresponds to module index.
        require(module != address(0) && module != SENTINEL_MODULES, "GS101");
        require(modules[prevModule] == module, "GS103");
        modules[prevModule] = modules[module];
        modules[module] = address(0);
        emit DisabledModule(module);
    }
    /// @dev Allows a Module to execute a Safe transaction without any further confirmations.
    /// @param to Destination address of module transaction.
    /// @param value Ether value of module transaction.
    /// @param data Data payload of module transaction.
    /// @param operation Operation type of module transaction.
    function execTransactionFromModule(
        address to,
        uint256 value,
        bytes memory data,
        Enum.Operation operation
    ) public virtual returns (bool success) {
        // Only whitelisted modules are allowed.
        require(msg.sender != SENTINEL_MODULES && modules[msg.sender] != address(0), "GS104");
        // Execute transaction without further confirmations.
        success = execute(to, value, data, operation, gasleft());
        if (success) emit ExecutionFromModuleSuccess(msg.sender);
        else emit ExecutionFromModuleFailure(msg.sender);
    }
    /// @dev Allows a Module to execute a Safe transaction without any further confirmations and return data
    /// @param to Destination address of module transaction.
    /// @param value Ether value of module transaction.
    /// @param data Data payload of module transaction.
    /// @param operation Operation type of module transaction.
    function execTransactionFromModuleReturnData(
        address to,
        uint256 value,
        bytes memory data,
        Enum.Operation operation
    ) public returns (bool success, bytes memory returnData) {
        success = execTransactionFromModule(to, value, data, operation);
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            // Load free memory location
            let ptr := mload(0x40)
            // We allocate memory for the return data by setting the free memory location to
            // current free memory location + data size + 32 bytes for data size value
            mstore(0x40, add(ptr, add(returndatasize(), 0x20)))
            // Store the size
            mstore(ptr, returndatasize())
            // Store the data
            returndatacopy(add(ptr, 0x20), 0, returndatasize())
            // Point the return data to the correct memory location
            returnData := ptr
        }
    }
    /// @dev Returns if an module is enabled
    /// @return True if the module is enabled
    function isModuleEnabled(address module) public view returns (bool) {
        return SENTINEL_MODULES != module && modules[module] != address(0);
    }
    /// @dev Returns array of modules.
    /// @param start Start of the page.
    /// @param pageSize Maximum number of modules that should be returned.
    /// @return array Array of modules.
    /// @return next Start of the next page.
    function getModulesPaginated(address start, uint256 pageSize) external view returns (address[] memory array, address next) {
        // Init array with max page size
        array = new address[](pageSize);
        // Populate return array
        uint256 moduleCount = 0;
        address currentModule = modules[start];
        while (currentModule != address(0x0) && currentModule != SENTINEL_MODULES && moduleCount < pageSize) {
            array[moduleCount] = currentModule;
            currentModule = modules[currentModule];
            moduleCount++;
        }
        next = currentModule;
        // Set correct size of returned array
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(array, moduleCount)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
import "../common/SelfAuthorized.sol";
/// @title OwnerManager - Manages a set of owners and a threshold to perform actions.
/// @author Stefan George - <stefan@gnosis.pm>
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.pm>
contract OwnerManager is SelfAuthorized {
    event AddedOwner(address owner);
    event RemovedOwner(address owner);
    event ChangedThreshold(uint256 threshold);
    address internal constant SENTINEL_OWNERS = address(0x1);
    mapping(address => address) internal owners;
    uint256 internal ownerCount;
    uint256 internal threshold;
    /// @dev Setup function sets initial storage of contract.
    /// @param _owners List of Safe owners.
    /// @param _threshold Number of required confirmations for a Safe transaction.
    function setupOwners(address[] memory _owners, uint256 _threshold) internal {
        // Threshold can only be 0 at initialization.
        // Check ensures that setup function can only be called once.
        require(threshold == 0, "GS200");
        // Validate that threshold is smaller than number of added owners.
        require(_threshold <= _owners.length, "GS201");
        // There has to be at least one Safe owner.
        require(_threshold >= 1, "GS202");
        // Initializing Safe owners.
        address currentOwner = SENTINEL_OWNERS;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < _owners.length; i++) {
            // Owner address cannot be null.
            address owner = _owners[i];
            require(owner != address(0) && owner != SENTINEL_OWNERS && owner != address(this) && currentOwner != owner, "GS203");
            // No duplicate owners allowed.
            require(owners[owner] == address(0), "GS204");
            owners[currentOwner] = owner;
            currentOwner = owner;
        }
        owners[currentOwner] = SENTINEL_OWNERS;
        ownerCount = _owners.length;
        threshold = _threshold;
    }
    /// @dev Allows to add a new owner to the Safe and update the threshold at the same time.
    ///      This can only be done via a Safe transaction.
    /// @notice Adds the owner `owner` to the Safe and updates the threshold to `_threshold`.
    /// @param owner New owner address.
    /// @param _threshold New threshold.
    function addOwnerWithThreshold(address owner, uint256 _threshold) public authorized {
        // Owner address cannot be null, the sentinel or the Safe itself.
        require(owner != address(0) && owner != SENTINEL_OWNERS && owner != address(this), "GS203");
        // No duplicate owners allowed.
        require(owners[owner] == address(0), "GS204");
        owners[owner] = owners[SENTINEL_OWNERS];
        owners[SENTINEL_OWNERS] = owner;
        ownerCount++;
        emit AddedOwner(owner);
        // Change threshold if threshold was changed.
        if (threshold != _threshold) changeThreshold(_threshold);
    }
    /// @dev Allows to remove an owner from the Safe and update the threshold at the same time.
    ///      This can only be done via a Safe transaction.
    /// @notice Removes the owner `owner` from the Safe and updates the threshold to `_threshold`.
    /// @param prevOwner Owner that pointed to the owner to be removed in the linked list
    /// @param owner Owner address to be removed.
    /// @param _threshold New threshold.
    function removeOwner(
        address prevOwner,
        address owner,
        uint256 _threshold
    ) public authorized {
        // Only allow to remove an owner, if threshold can still be reached.
        require(ownerCount - 1 >= _threshold, "GS201");
        // Validate owner address and check that it corresponds to owner index.
        require(owner != address(0) && owner != SENTINEL_OWNERS, "GS203");
        require(owners[prevOwner] == owner, "GS205");
        owners[prevOwner] = owners[owner];
        owners[owner] = address(0);
        ownerCount--;
        emit RemovedOwner(owner);
        // Change threshold if threshold was changed.
        if (threshold != _threshold) changeThreshold(_threshold);
    }
    /// @dev Allows to swap/replace an owner from the Safe with another address.
    ///      This can only be done via a Safe transaction.
    /// @notice Replaces the owner `oldOwner` in the Safe with `newOwner`.
    /// @param prevOwner Owner that pointed to the owner to be replaced in the linked list
    /// @param oldOwner Owner address to be replaced.
    /// @param newOwner New owner address.
    function swapOwner(
        address prevOwner,
        address oldOwner,
        address newOwner
    ) public authorized {
        // Owner address cannot be null, the sentinel or the Safe itself.
        require(newOwner != address(0) && newOwner != SENTINEL_OWNERS && newOwner != address(this), "GS203");
        // No duplicate owners allowed.
        require(owners[newOwner] == address(0), "GS204");
        // Validate oldOwner address and check that it corresponds to owner index.
        require(oldOwner != address(0) && oldOwner != SENTINEL_OWNERS, "GS203");
        require(owners[prevOwner] == oldOwner, "GS205");
        owners[newOwner] = owners[oldOwner];
        owners[prevOwner] = newOwner;
        owners[oldOwner] = address(0);
        emit RemovedOwner(oldOwner);
        emit AddedOwner(newOwner);
    }
    /// @dev Allows to update the number of required confirmations by Safe owners.
    ///      This can only be done via a Safe transaction.
    /// @notice Changes the threshold of the Safe to `_threshold`.
    /// @param _threshold New threshold.
    function changeThreshold(uint256 _threshold) public authorized {
        // Validate that threshold is smaller than number of owners.
        require(_threshold <= ownerCount, "GS201");
        // There has to be at least one Safe owner.
        require(_threshold >= 1, "GS202");
        threshold = _threshold;
        emit ChangedThreshold(threshold);
    }
    function getThreshold() public view returns (uint256) {
        return threshold;
    }
    function isOwner(address owner) public view returns (bool) {
        return owner != SENTINEL_OWNERS && owners[owner] != address(0);
    }
    /// @dev Returns array of owners.
    /// @return Array of Safe owners.
    function getOwners() public view returns (address[] memory) {
        address[] memory array = new address[](ownerCount);
        // populate return array
        uint256 index = 0;
        address currentOwner = owners[SENTINEL_OWNERS];
        while (currentOwner != SENTINEL_OWNERS) {
            array[index] = currentOwner;
            currentOwner = owners[currentOwner];
            index++;
        }
        return array;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
/// @title Enum - Collection of enums
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.pm>
contract Enum {
    enum Operation {Call, DelegateCall}
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
/// @title EtherPaymentFallback - A contract that has a fallback to accept ether payments
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.pm>
contract EtherPaymentFallback {
    event SafeReceived(address indexed sender, uint256 value);
    /// @dev Fallback function accepts Ether transactions.
    receive() external payable {
        emit SafeReceived(msg.sender, msg.value);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
/// @title SecuredTokenTransfer - Secure token transfer
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.pm>
contract SecuredTokenTransfer {
    /// @dev Transfers a token and returns if it was a success
    /// @param token Token that should be transferred
    /// @param receiver Receiver to whom the token should be transferred
    /// @param amount The amount of tokens that should be transferred
    function transferToken(
        address token,
        address receiver,
        uint256 amount
    ) internal returns (bool transferred) {
        // 0xa9059cbb - keccack("transfer(address,uint256)")
        bytes memory data = abi.encodeWithSelector(0xa9059cbb, receiver, amount);
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            // We write the return value to scratch space.
            // See https://docs.soliditylang.org/en/v0.7.6/internals/layout_in_memory.html#layout-in-memory
            let success := call(sub(gas(), 10000), token, 0, add(data, 0x20), mload(data), 0, 0x20)
            switch returndatasize()
                case 0 {
                    transferred := success
                }
                case 0x20 {
                    transferred := iszero(or(iszero(success), iszero(mload(0))))
                }
                default {
                    transferred := 0
                }
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
/// @title SelfAuthorized - authorizes current contract to perform actions
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.pm>
contract SelfAuthorized {
    function requireSelfCall() private view {
        require(msg.sender == address(this), "GS031");
    }
    modifier authorized() {
        // This is a function call as it minimized the bytecode size
        requireSelfCall();
        _;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
/// @title SignatureDecoder - Decodes signatures that a encoded as bytes
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.pm>
contract SignatureDecoder {
    /// @dev divides bytes signature into `uint8 v, bytes32 r, bytes32 s`.
    /// @notice Make sure to peform a bounds check for @param pos, to avoid out of bounds access on @param signatures
    /// @param pos which signature to read. A prior bounds check of this parameter should be performed, to avoid out of bounds access
    /// @param signatures concatenated rsv signatures
    function signatureSplit(bytes memory signatures, uint256 pos)
        internal
        pure
        returns (
            uint8 v,
            bytes32 r,
            bytes32 s
        )
    {
        // The signature format is a compact form of:
        //   {bytes32 r}{bytes32 s}{uint8 v}
        // Compact means, uint8 is not padded to 32 bytes.
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            let signaturePos := mul(0x41, pos)
            r := mload(add(signatures, add(signaturePos, 0x20)))
            s := mload(add(signatures, add(signaturePos, 0x40)))
            // Here we are loading the last 32 bytes, including 31 bytes
            // of 's'. There is no 'mload8' to do this.
            //
            // 'byte' is not working due to the Solidity parser, so lets
            // use the second best option, 'and'
            v := and(mload(add(signatures, add(signaturePos, 0x41))), 0xff)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
/// @title Singleton - Base for singleton contracts (should always be first super contract)
///         This contract is tightly coupled to our proxy contract (see `proxies/GnosisSafeProxy.sol`)
/// @author Richard Meissner - <richard@gnosis.io>
contract Singleton {
    // singleton always needs to be first declared variable, to ensure that it is at the same location as in the Proxy contract.
    // It should also always be ensured that the address is stored alone (uses a full word)
    address private singleton;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
/// @title StorageAccessible - generic base contract that allows callers to access all internal storage.
/// @notice See https://github.com/gnosis/util-contracts/blob/bb5fe5fb5df6d8400998094fb1b32a178a47c3a1/contracts/StorageAccessible.sol
contract StorageAccessible {
    /**
     * @dev Reads `length` bytes of storage in the currents contract
     * @param offset - the offset in the current contract's storage in words to start reading from
     * @param length - the number of words (32 bytes) of data to read
     * @return the bytes that were read.
     */
    function getStorageAt(uint256 offset, uint256 length) public view returns (bytes memory) {
        bytes memory result = new bytes(length * 32);
        for (uint256 index = 0; index < length; index++) {
            // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
            assembly {
                let word := sload(add(offset, index))
                mstore(add(add(result, 0x20), mul(index, 0x20)), word)
            }
        }
        return result;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a delegetecall on a targetContract in the context of self.
     * Internally reverts execution to avoid side effects (making it static).
     *
     * This method reverts with data equal to `abi.encode(bool(success), bytes(response))`.
     * Specifically, the `returndata` after a call to this method will be:
     * `success:bool || response.length:uint256 || response:bytes`.
     *
     * @param targetContract Address of the contract containing the code to execute.
     * @param calldataPayload Calldata that should be sent to the target contract (encoded method name and arguments).
     */
    function simulateAndRevert(address targetContract, bytes memory calldataPayload) external {
        // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
        assembly {
            let success := delegatecall(gas(), targetContract, add(calldataPayload, 0x20), mload(calldataPayload), 0, 0)
            mstore(0x00, success)
            mstore(0x20, returndatasize())
            returndatacopy(0x40, 0, returndatasize())
            revert(0, add(returndatasize(), 0x40))
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
/**
 * @title GnosisSafeMath
 * @dev Math operations with safety checks that revert on error
 * Renamed from SafeMath to GnosisSafeMath to avoid conflicts
 * TODO: remove once open zeppelin update to solc 0.5.0
 */
library GnosisSafeMath {
    /**
     * @dev Multiplies two numbers, reverts on overflow.
     */
    function mul(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        // Gas optimization: this is cheaper than requiring 'a' not being zero, but the
        // benefit is lost if 'b' is also tested.
        // See: https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/openzeppelin-solidity/pull/522
        if (a == 0) {
            return 0;
        }
        uint256 c = a * b;
        require(c / a == b);
        return c;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Subtracts two numbers, reverts on overflow (i.e. if subtrahend is greater than minuend).
     */
    function sub(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        require(b <= a);
        uint256 c = a - b;
        return c;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Adds two numbers, reverts on overflow.
     */
    function add(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 c = a + b;
        require(c >= a);
        return c;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the largest of two numbers.
     */
    function max(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a >= b ? a : b;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: LGPL-3.0-only
pragma solidity >=0.7.0 <0.9.0;
contract ISignatureValidatorConstants {
    // bytes4(keccak256("isValidSignature(bytes,bytes)")
    bytes4 internal constant EIP1271_MAGIC_VALUE = 0x20c13b0b;
}
abstract contract ISignatureValidator is ISignatureValidatorConstants {
    /**
     * @dev Should return whether the signature provided is valid for the provided data
     * @param _data Arbitrary length data signed on the behalf of address(this)
     * @param _signature Signature byte array associated with _data
     *
     * MUST return the bytes4 magic value 0x20c13b0b when function passes.
     * MUST NOT modify state (using STATICCALL for solc < 0.5, view modifier for solc > 0.5)
     * MUST allow external calls
     */
    function isValidSignature(bytes memory _data, bytes memory _signature) public view virtual returns (bytes4);
}